Yamaha ARIUS YDP-V240 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: ARIUS YDP-V240

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

YDP-V240

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual.

IMPORTANT — Check your power supply —

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage

selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for

the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the

panel.

Weitere Informationen über die Montage des Keyboard-Ständers erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen am Ende dieses Handbuchs.

WICHTIG — Überprüfen Sie Ihren Netzanschluss —

Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen Stromnetz mit der Spannung übereinstimmt, die auf dem Typenschild auf der

Unterseite des Instruments angegeben ist. In bestimmten Regionen ist auf der Unterseite des Keyboards in der Nähe des Netzkabels ein

Spannungswähler angebracht. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Spannungswähler auf die Spannung Ihres lokalen Stromnetzes eingestellt

ist. Dieser Spannungswähler ist bei Auslieferung auf 240 V eingestellt. Sie können die Einstellung mit einem Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern.

Drehen Sie dazu den Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf dem Instrument auf die richtige Spannung zeigt.

Pour obtenir des informations sur l'assemblage du support du clavier, reportez-vous aux instructions à la fin de ce manuel.

IMPORTANT — Contrôler la source d'alimentation —

Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être

équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est

bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce

réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis

à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau.

Para información sobre el montaje del soporte del teclado, consulte las instrucciones al final de este manual.

IMPORTANTE — Verifique la alimentación de corriente —

Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su area corresponde con la tension especificada en la placa de características del

panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal,

cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tension se

ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza ”recta” para girar el selector de

modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel.

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

Manual de instrucciones

2 Owner’s Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Ya maha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graph-

ics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics

appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated

on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec-

tion.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings.

The exclamation point within the equi-

lateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important operat-

ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc-

tions in the literature accompanying the

product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead sym-

bol, within the equilateral triangle, is

intended to alert the user to the presence

of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”

within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufﬁcient magnitude to constitute a

risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is prop-

erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner,

all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify

this unit or commission others to do so unless speciﬁcally

authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety

standards may be diminished. Claims ﬁled under the

expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been

modiﬁed. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be cor-

rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the

right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations without

notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Ya maha strives to produce

products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro-

duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In

keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we

want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is approx-

imately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the

replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incin-

erate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from chil-

dren. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by

applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required

by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have

the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for

you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed-

eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu-

facturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi-

bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates

the location of the name plate. The model number, serial

number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this

manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

92-469- ➀

Introduction

Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact

Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(class B)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Piano

Model Name : YDP-V240

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals

in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by

Ya maha Music U.K. Ltd.

(2 wires)

Die Seriennummer dieses Produkts beﬁndet sich an der

Unterseite des Geräts. Sie sollten die Nummer des Modells, die

Seriennummer und das Kaufdatum an den unten vorgesehenen

Stellen eintragen und diese Anleitung als Dokument Ihres Kaufs

aufbewahren.

Modellnr.

Seriennr.

(bottom)

Vous pouvez trouver le numéro de série de ce produit sur le bas de

l'unité. Notez ce numéro de série dans l'espace fourni ci-dessous et

conservez ce manuel en tant que preuve permanente de votre achat

aﬁn de faciliter l'identiﬁcation du produit en cas de vol.

N˚ de modèle

N˚ de série

El número de serie de este producto se encuentra en la parte

inferior de la unidad. Debe tomar nota del número de serie en el

espacio proporcionado a continuación y conservar este manual

como registro permanente de su adquisición; todo ello facilitará

la identiﬁcación en caso de robo.

Modelo nº

Serie nº

4 Owner’s Manual

(1)B-13 1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used

for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile

phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may

generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Assembly

Location

Owner’s Manual 5

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all

components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls

while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping

cloths.

• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur

and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the

wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any

water off immediately with a soft cloth.

•Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a

ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key

cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and

unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them

periodically using the included tool.

Saving and backing up your data

• The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory

when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the

Registration Memory (page 90.)

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save

important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a

computer (pages 98, 99, 109).

Backing up the USB storage device/external media

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

● Trademarks

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Using the bench (If included)

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

(1)B-13 2/2

6 Owner’s Manual

The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this

electronic keyboard:

Mona Lisa

from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.

Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans

Composition Title : Against All Odds

Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403

AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD

mance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.

Can’t Help Falling In Love

from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII

Words and Music by George David Weiss,

Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore

Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane

Music Publishing Company, Inc.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.

Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that

some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control

parameters and effects.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and

open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle con-

taining lyric data is played.

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-

vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-

puter is on).

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it

has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI

ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use

is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE

ILLEGAL COPIES.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited

except for your personal use.

Logos

Owner’s Manual 7

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha Digital Piano!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following: Owner’s Manual

(this book)

■ Introduction (page 2):

Please read this section ﬁrst.

■ Reference (page 70):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions.

■ Appendix (page 110):

This section introduces reference material.

Data List

You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI

Implementation Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library.

Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as

“YDP-V240”) in the Model Name text box, then click the Search button.

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

•Accessory CD-ROM

•Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide

• Owner’s manual (this book)

•Bench

*A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale.

•My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you ﬁll out the User Registration form.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

Accessories

8 Owner’s Manual

Special Features

GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard

with matte black keytops

Graded Hammer Standard keyboard with matte black keytops on the instrument, feature graded key

weight and response throughout the keyboard range. They respond to a heavier touch in the low range

of the keyboard and a lighter touch in the higher range of the keyboard, thus providing natural grand-

piano type playability. The matte ﬁnish of the black keys enhances keyboard’s luxurious appearance.

The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for tremolo and other repetitive-striking

techniques.

■ Performance assistant technology Page 39

Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect

performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do

is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the

keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in

time with the music.

And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply

by tapping one key.

All you need is

one ﬁnger!

■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 17

The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be

changed to violin, ﬂute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can

change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to

play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles Page 27

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-

ering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and

much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-

iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.

■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 37

When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the

display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If

the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear

on the score display.

* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display func-

tion does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.

Owner’s Manual 9

Introduction

Logos........................................................................................ 6

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ................................ 7

Accessories .............................................................................. 7

Special Features ...................................................................... 8

Setting Up 10

Key Cover............................................................................... 10

Music Rest.............................................................................. 10

Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)............ 11

Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11

Using Headphones................................................................. 12

Maintenance........................................................................... 13

Panel Controls and Terminals 14

Front Panel............................................................................. 15

Pedals, Jacks and Terminals ................................................. 15

Quick Guide

Changing the Display Language 16

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN............................................. 17

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19

Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20

Using the Pedals .................................................................... 21

Fun Sounds 22

Drum Kits................................................................................ 22

Sound Effects ......................................................................... 22

The Metronome 23

Start the Metronome............................................................... 23

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 23

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,

and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 24

Setting the Click bell sound .................................................... 25

Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 25

Playing Styles 26

Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 26

Play Along with a Style........................................................... 27

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 31

Using Songs 32

Play the Demo song ............................................................... 32

Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 33

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 34

Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 34

Song List ................................................................................ 35

Types of Songs ...................................................................... 36

Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 37

Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 38

The Easy Way to Play Piano 39

CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 40

CHORD/FREE Type—

Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 42

MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 44

CHORD/MELODY—

Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 46

Select a Song For a Lesson 50

Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 51

Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 54

Lesson 3—Minus One............................................................ 55

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 56

Play Using the Music Database 57

Change a Song’s Style 58

Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 58

Using the Easy Song Arranger............................................... 58

Record Your Own Performance 60

Recording Procedure ............................................................. 61

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs......................................... 63

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 64

Backup and Initialization 65

Backup....................................................................................65

Initialization.............................................................................65

Basic Operation 66

Basic Operation ......................................................................66

The Displays...........................................................................68

MAIN Display Items ................................................................69

Reference

Play with a Variety of Effects 70

Adding Harmony.....................................................................70

Adding Reverb........................................................................71

Adding Chorus........................................................................72

Adding DSP ............................................................................73

Adding Sustain .......................................................................74

Handy Performance Features 75

Tap Start.................................................................................75

Touch Response Sensitivity ...................................................75

One Touch Setting..................................................................76

Select a Sound Type ..............................................................77

Pitch Controls .........................................................................78

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 79

Pattern Variation (Sections)....................................................79

Setting the Split Point .............................................................82

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment)......................................................83

Adjusting the Style Volume.....................................................83

Chord Basics ..........................................................................84

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard ..............................86

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary.....................87

Song Settings 88

Song Volume ..........................................................................88

A-B Repeat .............................................................................88

Muting Independent Song Parts .............................................89

Change the Melody Voice ......................................................89

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 90

Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................90

Recalling a Registration Memory............................................91

The Functions 92

Selecting and Setting Functions .............................................92

Saving and Loading Data 95

Connecting a USB Flash Memory ..........................................95

Formatting USB Flash Memory ..............................................97

Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory ......98

Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory ..............................99

Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory.............................100

Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory ............................101

Delete User Data from the Instrument..................................102

Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory ...................102

Connections 103

Connectors ...........................................................................103

Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................104

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer .....105

Remote Control of MIDI Devices ..........................................106

Initial Send............................................................................107

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument...107

Appendix

Troubleshooting....................................................................110

Messages .............................................................................112

Keyboard Stand Assembly............................... 114

Index.....................................................................................118

Scores ..................................................................................120

Voice List ..............................................................................126

Drum Kit List .........................................................................132

Style List ...............................................................................134

Music Database List .............................................................135

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM..........................136

Harmony Type List ...............................................................137

Effect Type List.....................................................................138

Specifications .......................................................................144

Contents

10 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

■ To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

■ To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover

over the keys.

■ To raise the music rest:

Pull the music rest up and toward yourself

as far as it will go.

Flip down the two metal supports at the left

and right on the rear of the music rest.

Lower the music rest so that it rests on the

metal supports.

■ To lower the music rest:

Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as

it will go.

Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of

the music rest).

Gently lower the music rest backward until

it is all the way down.

Key Cover

• Be careful to avoid catching your

ﬁngers when opening or closing

the cover.

CAUTION

• Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not

release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid

catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s) between

the cover and main unit.

CAUTION

• Do not place objects, such as a piece of metal or paper, on top of

the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall

inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly

impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short cir-

cuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

CAUTION

Music Rest

• Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When

lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music

rest until it is all the way down.

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 11

Setting Up

Connect the instrument’s USB TO HOST terminal to

the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer

performance data and song ﬁles between the two (page

104). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need

to do the following:

• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-

ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable

to connect the instrument to the computer. After

making the connections, turn the instrument’s

power on.

• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.

Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”.

Turn down the volume by turning the [MAS-

TER VOLUME] control to the left.

Check the power cord to make sure it is

connected properly. (See page 116.)

Press the power switch to turn on the

power.

Press the power switch again to turn the power OFF.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory is loaded to the instru-

ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data

exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument settings are

restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is

turned on.

Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)

USB

TO HOST

USB cable

Computer

USB TO HOST

terminal

Turning the Power On

Power indicator

Power switch

Power indicator

• If you forget to turn off the power to the instrument and close the key

cover, the power indicator will remain lit, indicating that the power is still

on.

NOTE

• Even when the switch is in the “off” position, electricity is still

ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC

power cord from the wall AC outlet.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message

is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the ﬂash memory

and result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

12 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES]

jacks.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.

You can connect two sets of standard stereo head-

phones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones,

you can plug them into either jack.)

Using Headphones

PHONES

Standard stereo phone plug

Bottom surface

Using the Headphone Hanger

A headphone hanger is included in the package so

that you can hang the headphoneson this instrument.

Install the headphone hanger using the included two

screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

• Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the

hanger. Otherwise, this instrument or the hanger may be dam-

aged.

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 13

Setting Up

To keep your instrument in optimum condition, we recommend that you periodically follow the maintenance points

below.

■ Instrument and Bench Maintenance

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly

damp cloth.

Tighten the screws of the instrument and bench periodi-

cally.

■ Pedal Cleaning

As with an acoustic piano, pedals may become tar-

nished across the ages. When this occurs, polish the

pedal with a compound designed for piano pedals.

Before using the compound, make sure to read the

instructions for proper usage.

■ Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need

to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

■ Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the

instrument along with other belongings. You can move

the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the

unit down to the condition it was in when you ﬁrst took

it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally.

Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side.

Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or

shock.

When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure

all screws are properly tightened and have not been

loosened by moving the instrument.

Maintenance

• Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-

impregnated wiping cloths.

CAUTION

• Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-

impregnated wiping cloths. Otherwise, the pedal may become dis-

colored or degraded.

CAUTION

14 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

PHONES

USB

TO HOST

PEDAL

Voice Category List (page 126)

Style Category List (page 134)

Song Category List (page 35)

Music Database List (page 135)

tyu

!4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9

Owner’s Manual 15

Panel Controls and Terminals

q Power switch ( ) ...................................page 11

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ...........pages 11, 66

e [DEMO] button.........................................page 32

r FILE CONTROL [MENU],

[EXECUTE] buttons.......................pages 95–101

t [LYRICS] button.......................................page 38

y [SCORE] button.......................................page 37

u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button............................page 40

i [FUNCTION] button.........................pages 68, 92

o [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .............page 23

!0 [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................pages 34, 75

!1 LESSON [L], [R], [START] buttons.........page 51

!2 SONG MEMORY

[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons ......................page 61

!3 [REPEAT & LEARN]/

[ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................pages 56, 27

!4 [A-B REPEAT]/

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............pages 88, 79

!5 [REW]/[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ...pages 34, 79

!6 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ...............pages 34, 81

!7 [PAUSE]/[SYNC START] button......pages 34, 80

!8 [START/STOP] button ...............pages 26, 33, 67

!9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button....................page 57

@0 [CONTRAST] knob ................................. page 69

@1 [EXIT] button........................................... page 68

@2 [SONG] button ........................................ page 33

@3 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button ....... page 58

@4 [STYLE] button ....................................... page 26

@5 [VOICE] button........................................ page 17

@6 Dial....................................................pages 67, 92

@7 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons .............................................pages 67, 92

@8 Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons............................pages 67, 92

@9 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.......................... page 19

#0 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................... page 18

#1 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ................. page 70

#2 [DSP ON/OFF] button............................. page 73

#3 [PIANO RESET] button .......................... page 20

#4 REGIST MEMORY

[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons......... page 90

#5 Drum Kit .................................................. page 22

The illustrations above each key indicate the drum and

percussion instruments assigned to the keys when

“Standard Kit 1” is selected.

#6 Pedals.......................................................page 21

#7 [PEDAL] jack..........................................page 116

#8 [PHONES] jacks.......................................page 12

#9 USB TO DEVICE terminal....................... page 96

$0 USB TO HOST terminal ........................ page 104

Front Panel

#0 #1

Display (pages 68, 69)

Pedals, Jacks and Terminals

16 Owner’s Manual

Changing the Display Language

This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display

language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to

Japanese the lyrics, ﬁle names, demo display, and some messages will be

displayed in Japanese where appropriate.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of

times until the “Language” item appears.

The currently selected display language will appear below the “Lan-

guage” item.

When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the lan-

guage as required.

Select a display language.

The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese.

The language selection will be stored in the internal ﬂash memory so

that it is retained even when the power is turned off.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Language item

The currently selected

language

Quick Guide

Owner’s Manual 17

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,

this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,

strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide vari-

ety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The main voice selection display will appear.

The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The avail-

able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice

selected here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “106 Flute” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

The currently

selected voice num-

ber and name

Select 106 Flute

Adjusts volume.

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

18 Owner’s Manual

You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.

The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.

The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.

When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN dis-

play. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the

main voice when you play the keyboard.

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

The dual voice selection display will appear.

Select the desired dual voice.

Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.

For this example try selecting the “124 Vibraphone” voice.

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

Voice Number

The currently selected dual voice

Dual voice selection display

Hold for longer

than a second

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual 19

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main

and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split

point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 82).

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.

The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When

turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The

currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split

point.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

The split voice selection display will appear.

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

Two voices will sound at the same time.

021

(A-1)

024

(C0)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

108

(C7)

Main voice and dual voice

Split voice

Split point (default value is 054)

Voice Number

The currently selected split

voice

Split voice selection display

Hold for longer

than a second

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

20 Owner’s Manual

Select the desired split voice.

Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice

which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example

try selecting the “042 Folk Guitar” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PIANO RESET] button.

The “001 Natural! Grand Piano” voice will be selected.

Play the Grand Piano Voice

• When you press the [PIANO

RESET] button all settings other

than touch sensitivity are turned

off. The dual and split voices will

also be turned off, so only the

Grand Piano voice will play over

the entire keyboard.

NOTE

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

Owner’s Manual 21

The instrument has three foot pedals that produce a

range of expressive effects similar to those produced

by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

Damper (Right) Pedal

The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an

acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer.

Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-pedal function.

Sostenuto (Center) Pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal

while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the

pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played

notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for

example, while other notes are played “staccato.”

Soft (Left) Pedal

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes

played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that

are already playing when it is pressed.

Using the Pedals

• If the damper pedal doesn’t

work, make sure that the pedal

cord is properly plugged into the

jack (page 116).

NOTE

Half-pedal:

• While playing the piano with

Sustain and you want to slightly

mute the sustained sound,

release the damper pedal from

maximum position to half posi-

tion.

NOTE

• The pedal functions do not

affect Split voice.

NOTE

When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you play

before you release the pedal

have a longer sustain.

• Organ, string and choir voices

will continue to sound for as

long as the sostenuto pedal is

depressed.

NOTE

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note, the note will sustain as

long as you hold the pedal.

22 Owner’s Manual

Fun Sounds

This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can

use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet ﬂy-bys, eerie effects, and

much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.

◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Use the dial to select “132 Standard Kit 1”.

3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!

Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percus-

sion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll

hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a

comprehensive variety of drum and percussion

sounds. For details on the instruments included

in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 132 to

143), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 132.

◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Use the dial to select “143 SFX Kit 2”.

3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!

As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a

submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many

other useful effects. “142 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning,

running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do

not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore pro-

duce no sound.

For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit

voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum

Kit List” on page 133.

Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other

normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at

different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound

of a different drum or percussion instrument.

The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 142 and 143). When

either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.

Drum Kits

Sound Effects

Owner’s Manual 23

The Metronome

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and

time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable

for you.

Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [MET-

RONOME ON/OFF] button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button

again.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo set-

ting.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280.

Start the Metronome

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

4/4

Current setting

Tempo

The Metronome

24 Owner’s Manual

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for

longer than a second to select the function “Time Signa-

ture–Numerator”.

Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure.

The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example.

A bell accent will be sounded at the ﬁrst beat of each measure.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times

as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Sig-

nature–Denominator”.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter

note, eighth note, or 16

note). Select 8 for this example.

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat

Hold for longer

than a second

Denominator

(The length of

one beat.)

Numerator

(Number of

beats per

measure.)

• The metronome time signature

will synchronize to a style or

song that is playing, so these

parameters cannot be changed

while a style or song is playing.

NOTE

The Metronome

Owner’s Manual 25

This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Bell

item.

You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn the bell

sound on or off.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Met-

ronome Volume item.

Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required.

Setting the Click bell sound

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Metronome volume

26 Owner’s Manual

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces

accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to

match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 dif-

ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures

(see page 134 for a complete list of the available styles).

In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro

trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played

using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number

and name will be highlighted.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use.

A list of all the available styles is provided on page 134.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop

playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

• When you play the style, set the

Sound Type to “Style.” Doing

this a more natural, enhanced

sound over the internal speak-

ers (see page 77). However,

when using the headphones,

normal sound is applied.

NOTE

The currently selected style

• Style ﬁles transferred from a

computer or stored on a USB

ﬂash memory device connected

to the instrument can be

selected and used in the same

way as the internal Styles (Style

numbers 161–). File transfer

instructions are provided on

page 107.

NOTE

• Style numbers 131, 143–160

have no rhythm part and there-

fore no rhythm will play if you

use them for the above exam-

ple. For these styles ﬁrst turn

auto accompaniment on as

described on page 27, press the

[START/STOP] button, and the

accompaniment bass and chord

parts will begin playing when

you play a key to the left of the

keyboard split point.

NOTE

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual 27

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-

paniment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment

off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

Play Along with a Style

● When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (054: F#2) becomes

the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the

accompaniment chords.

This icon appears when

automatic accompani-

ment is on.

• The keyboard split point can be

changed as required: refer to

page 82.

NOTE

Split point (054: F#2)

Auto accompaniment region

Flashes when sync start

is on.

Playing Styles

28 Owner’s Manual

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a

style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard

split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function

off.

Play a left-hand chord to start the style.

You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.

This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-

ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.

The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you

play.

Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody

with your right hand.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback

when you’re done.

You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.

Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 79.

Try this!

Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 29. These

examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progres-

sions sound good with the styles.

Split point

Auto accompaniment region

Split point

Auto accompaniment region

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual 29

Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords

Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.

In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord

sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different ﬁngerings of the same

chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge inﬂuence on the overall

feel of the music you play.

On page 27 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital

to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take

your accompaniments to a new level.

On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the

instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively

creating a complete song.

■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Play the scores with the left hand.

Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 27.

* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simpliﬁed scores that indicate which notes to play to

produce the chord progressions.

—Dance music with simple chords—

This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start

again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.

Recommended Style

041 Euro Trance

Play to the left of the split point.

Split point

C G Am

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

30 Owner’s Manual

—3-chord boogie-woogie—

This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the

progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!

—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—

This progression includes jazzy “two-ﬁve” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When

you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Recommended Style

148 Piano Boogie

Recommended Style

096 Bossa Nova

C C

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Dm CM7

Am A7

FM7

Bm7

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

Owner’s Manual 31

There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:

● Easy Chords

● Standard Chords

The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 27). The keyboard to the left of the

split point (default: 054/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this

area of the keyboard.

■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you easily play chords in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard using only

one, two, or three ﬁngers.

■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you produce accompaniment by

playing chords using normal ﬁngerings in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords

DEFGABCDEF

Split point (default: 054/F#2)

Root notes and the corresponding keys

Accompaniment

range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of the chord.

Cm7

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest black key to the left of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white key to the left of it.

•To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white and black keys to the left

of it (three keys altogether).

( )

CmM7

CM7

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

Cdim

Cdim7

CmM7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

(

)

(

b13

)

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]

* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords

will be recognized without them.

32 Owner’s Manual

Using Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a

piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to a demo song and 29

internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions

provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and

more. The songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to play a demo song and select other

songs, and brieﬂy describe the demo song and 29 songs provided.

Press the [DEMO] button

The demo song will start playing.

To stop demo play back at any time, press the [DEMO] button or

[START/STOP] button.

Play the Demo song

Listen Lesson Record

Song

Using Songs

Owner’s Manual 33

Press the [SONG] button

The song selection display will appear.

The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 35.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

Select and Listen to a Song

001–030 Built in Songs (See page 35)

031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself).

036–

Songs transferred from a computer (pages 107–109) or Songs in a

USB ﬂash memory connected to the instrument (page 95)

The currently selected song

number and name

•You can also play songs you

have recorded yourself (User

Songs) or songs that have been

transferred to the instrument

from a computer in the same

way that you play the internal

songs.

NOTE

The song highlighted here

can be played

Song start!

Using Songs

34 Owner’s Manual

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],

rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.

You can change the song tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will

appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to

anywhere from 5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

Change the Song Tempo

PAUSE

Press the pause

button to pause

playback.

REW

Press the fast

reverse button to

rapidly return to an

earlier point in the

song.

Press the fast for-

ward button to rap-

idly skip ahead to

a later point in the

song.

Using Songs

Owner’s Manual 35

These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature,

songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-

gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.

: Includes chord data.

The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song

Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.

Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same

as the original.

Song List

Category No. Name Suggested Uses

Main Demo

1 Mozart Piano Sonata No.13, K333 This song showcases the beautiful piano sound.

2 Winter Serenade

The songs in this category have been created to give

you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this

instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with

the various features.

3Take off

Voice Demo

4 Live! Grand Demo

These songs features some of the instrument’s many

useful voices. They make maximum use of the

characteristics of each voice, and might serve as

inspiration for your own compositions.

5 Live! Orchestra Demo

6 Cool! RotorOrgan Demo

7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo

8 ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo

Function Demo

9 Hallelujah Chorus

Use these songs to experience some of the

instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for

the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the

performance assistant technology feature.

The lesson function cannot be used with songs 10

and 11.

10 Ave Maria

11 Nocturne op.9-2

Piano Solo

12 For Elise

These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as

lesson songs.

13 Maple Leaf Rag

14 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair

Piano Ensemble

15 Amazing Grace

A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also

well suited for use as lesson songs.

16 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)

17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.

18 Scarborough Fair

19 Old Folks at Home

Piano

Accompaniment

20 Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)

When you need to practice backing (accompaniment)

patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is

ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band.

These songs allow you to practice backing parts one

hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to

master this important skill.

21 Ep Ballad

22 Boogie Woogie

23 Rock Piano

24 Salsa

25 Country Piano

26 Gospel R&B

27 Medium Swing

28 Jazz Waltz

29 Medium Bossa

SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George

David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)

CHORD

Using Songs

36 Owner’s Manual

The following three types of songs can be used by this instrument.

● Demo Song and Preset songs

(the 30 songs built into the instrument)........................................Song numbers 001–030.

● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.

● External song ﬁles (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.

* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 108 for instructions on how

to transfer the songs to the instrument.

The chart below shows the basic processes ﬂow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song

ﬁles from storage to playback.

Types of Songs

Record

(page 60)

Connect

(page 103)

Transfer

(page 107)

Your own

performance

Song Song

Computer USB ﬂash memory

Song Song Song

Save

Play

Song Storage locations

External Songs (loaded Song)

(036–)

USB

(036–)

User Songs

(031–035)

Preset Songs

(001–030)

The 30 songs built

into the instrument.

Load

• User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song ﬁle

to SMF and save it to USB ﬂash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing

score display and can be used with the lesson features.

NOTE

• Different ﬂash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song ﬁles

transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the ﬂash

memory area for the external song, and vice versa.

NOTE

Using Songs

Owner’s Manual 37

This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs.

Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB ﬂash

memory or the instrument’s internal ﬂash memory.

Select a song.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 33.

Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will

appear.

There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.

These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of

the score to indicate the current location.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Displaying the Song Score

• The score is created from the

recorded song data, and it may

not be exactly the same as orig-

inal score.

• Both chords and lyrics will be

shown in single-staff score dis-

play of a song that includes

chord and lyric data.

• When there are many lyrics they

may be displayed in two rows a

measure.

• Some lyrics or chords may be

abbreviated if the selected song

has a lot of lyrics.

• Small notes that are hard to

read may be easier to read after

you use the quantize function

(page 94).

NOTE

Single-staff

Double-staff

Melody score

Marker

Chord

Lyrics

• No chords or lyrics are shown

on the double-staff.

NOTE

Using Songs

38 Owner’s Manual

If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.

No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed.

Select a song.

Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2

described on page 33.

Press the [LYRICS] button.

The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the

display.

The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song.

■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display

Display the Lyrics

Number Name

016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)

020 Against All Odds (Collins 0007403)

030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)

• If the lyrics display shows gar-

bled characters, try changing

the display language (page 16).

NOTE

• Songs downloaded from the

Internet or commercially avail-

able song ﬁles, including XF for-

mat ﬁles (page 6), are

compatible with the lyrics dis-

play features as long as they are

standard MIDI ﬁle format ﬁles

containing lyric data. Lyrics dis-

play may not be possible with

some ﬁles.

NOTE

Song title, lyricist,

and composer.

Lyrics and chord

display

Owner’s Manual 39

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature

that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even

though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any

notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the

results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and

can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun.

Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results

for you.

● Chord...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-bal-

anced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play

anything with both your left and right hands.

● Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-

hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the

left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to

support the melody you are playing with your right hand.

● Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any

keys with just one ﬁnger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve

never played a keyboard instrument before!

● Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one ﬁnger on the right-hand

section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the

keyboard using the Chord type.

Refer to page 48 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.

Split point

Play your own melody with the right hand.

Split point

The Easy Way to Play Piano

40 Owner’s Manual

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-

formance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the

Chord type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave

Maria”.

When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song

can be seen in the display!

CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands

● What is a Song?

You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term

“Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance

assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should

always be used with a song (page 32).

The currently

selected type

Hold for longer than a second

Select Chord

• Using Songs (page 32)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual 41

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for

four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin play-

ing yourself from the ﬁfth measure. The keys you should play will be

shown in the display.

Play on the keyboard.

Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the

same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at

measure ﬁve the notes will come out according to the score on the right.

Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will

continue to “correct” the notes that you play.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord type.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-

ogy type is normally shown.

Before After

• The score for Ave Maria is pro-

vided on page 122.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

42 Owner’s Manual

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-

formance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD/FREE type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the

Chord/Free type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Noc-

turne”.

CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only

The currently

selected type

Hold for longer

than a second

Select

Chord/Free

• Using Songs (page 32)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual 43

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display.

Play on the keyboard.

Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of

the split point with your left hand.

Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-

A-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the

display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your

left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type.

Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand

part in the display.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-

ogy type is normally shown.

Split point

With this type notes played on the

left-hand side of the split point will

actually sound an octave higher.

• The score for Nocturne is pro-

vided on page 124.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

44 Owner’s Manual

See page 48 for some hints on how to play melodies.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-

formance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the MELODY type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Mel-

ody type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial.

MELODY Type—Play with One Finger

The currently

selected type

Select Melody

Hold for longer than a second

• Using Songs (page 32)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual 45

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not

sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5).

Play on the keyboard.

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one ﬁn-

ger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If

you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE]

button to call up the melody score in the display.

How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one ﬁnger

thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type!

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-

ogy type is normally shown.

Song start!

Sounds like a

melody!

The Easy Way to Play Piano

46 Owner’s Manual

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the per-

formance assistant technology feature is on.

Select the CHORD/MELODY type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the

Chord/Melody type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial.

CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right

The currently

selected type

Select

Chord/Melody

Hold for longer than a second

• Using Songs (page 32)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual 47

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memoriz-

ing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth mea-

sure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of

the split point with your left hand.

Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand.

You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split

point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases

with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song

melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your

left hand.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type.

If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the

[SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

“...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technol-

ogy type is normally shown.

Split point

With this type notes played on the

left-hand side of the split point will

actually sound an octave higher.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

48 Owner’s Manual

Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!

Here are a few hints for using the Chord type.

If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the

keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the left-

hand section of the keyboard.

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands

spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately

with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you

play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of

playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a

melody with your right ... or any other combination.

The chord information

included in the song is

displayed in the lower

area of the MAIN display.

You will get even better

results if you match your

left-hand rhythm to rhythm

of the chord indicator in

the display.

Sounds like you’re

playing the right

notes!

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

● Play alternately with the left

and right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index ﬁnger

→

middle ﬁnger

→

ring ﬁnger).

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

Owner’s Manual 49

Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type.

If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen

score feature.

Displaying the Score.

After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 44, press the [SCORE] button.

The melody score will appear.

The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback.

If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score

you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm.

● Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology.

When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that

include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only

work with songs that include melody data. In order to ﬁnd out if a song includes the required data, ﬁrst

select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the

[SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If

melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any

combination type that includes the Melody type.

● External Songs and the performance assistant technology.

Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as

long as they include the required chord and/or melody data.

See page 108 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument.

Chord

Marker

Melody

Appears when the performance

assistant technology is on

Play while watching the

marker

50 Owner’s Manual

Lesson Flow:

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!

The practice methods:

● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.

● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.

● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.

Select the

song you

want to learn.

Select the part you

want to work on

(right hand, left

hand, both hands).

Select lesson

1, 2, or 3.

Lesson

start!

• Song numbers 10 and 11 are

function demos for perfor-

mance assistant. The lesson

function cannot be used with

them.

NOTE

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or

both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0/1)

transferred to the instrument from a computer. (page 107) During the

lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play

wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can han-

dle. It’s never too late to start learning!

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual 51

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you

play the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want

to use for your lesson. As listed on page 35 there are a variety of song

types.

Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand

lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-

hands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right cor-

ner of the display.

Lesson 1—Waiting

Select R for right-hand lesson.

Select L for left-hand lesson.

Select LR for bothhands lesson.

Select a Song For a Lesson

52 Owner’s Manual

Start Lesson 1.

Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the

LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in

sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... An

explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few

seconds before the lesson begins.

Song playback will begin automatically when you select

Lesson 1.

Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played

is indicated by a dot (●) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen

keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the

next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the

correct note. The triangular marker (▼) above the score indicates play-

back progress.

(Lesson 1)

(Lesson 2)

(Lesson 3)

(Song Lesson off)

In this case the “R1” indicates that right-

hand lesson 1 has been selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

▼ Marker

● Marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual 53

Stop the Lesson mode

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.

■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again

from the beginning.

● Shifting the keyboard left or right.

The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by

pressing the [+] or [-] button.

61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. This instrument

actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes,

those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on

the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of

the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or

right so you can see the notes (the ● marker will appear on the appropriate

key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range

cannot be used in the lesson.

The displayed range (61 keys)

Actual keyboard range is 88 keys

When the lesson song has played all the way

through your performance will be evaluated in 4

levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent.

“Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.

• The evaluation feature can be

turned off via the FUNCTION

Grade item (page 94).

NOTE

Select a Song For a Lesson

54 Owner’s Manual

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed

you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own

pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

3 on page 51).

Start Lesson 2.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is

selected.

The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to

indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct

timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo

will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original

tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

In this case the “R2” indicates

that right-hand lesson 2 has

been selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Play while following the

score marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

Owner’s Manual 55

Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you

have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

3 on page 51).

Start Lesson 3.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is

selected.

Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard

marker in the display will indicate the notes to play.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Lesson 3—Minus One

In this case the “R3” indicates

that right-hand lesson 3 has

been selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

▼ Marker

● Marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

56 Owner’s Manual

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to

repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult.

Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson.

The song location will move back four measures from the point at

which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-

sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you

pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four mea-

sures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all

you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you

make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it

right

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

•You can change the number of

measures the Repeat and learn

function jumps back by pressing

a number button [1]–[9] during

repeat playback.

NOTE

Press imme-

diately

Oops!

A mistake!

e Jump back 4 measures and

repeat playback

Song playback

direction

Owner’s Manual 57

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to

select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...

simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel

settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of

sounds and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database list will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 135 of

the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that

matches the image of the song you intend to play.

For this example select the “158 Patrol”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your

right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the

left of the split point (page 27). Refer to pages 29–31 for information

about playing chords.

If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this

point you can check the assigned voice and style.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

• Music Database (MDB) ﬁles

transferred from a computer or

stored on a USB ﬂash memory

device connected to the instru-

ment can be selected and used

in the same way as the internal

Music Databases (MDB num-

bers 301–). File transfer instruc-

tions are provided on page 107.

NOTE

Split Point

58 Owner’s Manual

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to

play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you

can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova,

as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by

changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for

a complete change of image.

You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song.

Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009

Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin

playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song

Arranger feature will appear on the display.

As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall

image of the song.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other

songs as well—any songs that include chord data.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name

and number will be highlighted.

Select a Song.

Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.

Try Out the Easy Song Arranger

Using the Easy Song Arranger

• The score for Hallelujah Chorus

is provided on page 120.

NOTE

The currently selected song

number and name are dis-

played here.

Change a Song’s Style

Owner’s Manual 59

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move

on to the next step while the song is playing.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name

and number will be highlighted.

Select a style.

Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.

As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only

the styles change.

Select a voice part.

If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a

voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be

selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button.

Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.

Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody

voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice

changes.

• When playing song numbers

010, 011, and 020 to 030 while

using the Easy Song Arranger,

melody tracks will be automati-

cally muted and no melody will

sound. In order to hear the mel-

ody tracks you will need to press

the SONG MEMORY buttons [3]

to [5].

NOTE

Song start!

The currently selected style

number and name are dis-

played here.

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by playing

in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/

OFF] button will not function.

• If the time signature of the song

and style are different, the time

signature of the song will be

used.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

The Melody R and Melody

L displays will be selected

alternately each time you

press the [VOICE] button.

The currently selected mel-

ody voice will be displayed.

• If you press the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button during style play-

back, the style will stop but the

song will continue playing. Use

the [START/STOP] button to

stop playback completely.

NOTE

60 Owner’s Manual

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as

user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved

as user songs they can be played in the same way as the internal

songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB ﬂash memory device, as

described on page 99.

■ Recordable Data

5 melody tracks and 1 Style (chord) track can be recorded. To record your own

performance, ﬁrst use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to spec-

ify the track(s) you want to record on.

● SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5]

Record the melody parts.

● SONG MEMORY (Track) [A]

Records the style pattern and chord parts.

■ Track Mute

This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back

while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 89).

• Up to approximately 30,000

notes can be recorded for the

ﬁve user songs if you record

only to the melody tracks.

• User songs are saved as SMF

(Standard MIDI File) format 0

ﬁles. Refer to page 107 for infor-

mation on SMF ﬁles.

NOTE

Melody Chords

Specify track(s)

and record

Track

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual 61

From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use

the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you

want to record to.

Select the track(s) you want to record to and conﬁrm your

selection on the display.

◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track

Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display.

◆ Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual

voice. Split voices cannot be recorded.

The selected track will be highlighted in the display.

Recording Procedure

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a sec-

ond time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while

recording is in progress.

Rotate the dial to select a

song number between 031

and 035.

• If you record to track that con-

tains previously-recorded

data the previous data will be

overwritten and lost.

CAUTION

• Style accompaniment is auto-

matically turned on when you

select the style track [A] for

recording.

• Style accompaniment cannot

turned on or off while recording

is in progress.

NOTE

Press and hold

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet been

recorded, the style track [A] will

automatically be selected for

recording when a melody track

is selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be sure

to turn the style track [A] off.

NOTE

Record Your Own Performance

62 Owner’s Manual

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]

button.

When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001

and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box

border.

Save the song.

When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save

the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or

the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the

song will be stored as a MIDI ﬁle in song number 031–035.

If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the conﬁrmation message

the song will not be saved as a MIDI ﬁle but will remain in the instru-

ment’s memory until the power is turned off, so you have the option of

converting the song to a MIDI ﬁle and saving it later. To do this press

and hold the [REC] button until the save conﬁrmation message appears,

then press the [+/YES] button.

• If the memory becomes full dur-

ing recording a warning mes-

sage will appear and recording

will stop automatically. Use the

song clear or track clear (page

63) function to delete unwanted

data and make more room avail-

able for recording, then do the

recording again.

NOTE

Recording

starts

Current measure

• If you press the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button while recording

a style track, an appropriate

ending pattern will play and then

recording will stop.

NOTE

• The recorded Song data will

be lost if you turn the power

to the instrument off without

executing the Save operation.

CAUTION

Record Your Own Performance

Owner’s Manual 63

When the recording is done ...

◆ To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 32).

1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display.

2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial

to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.

3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.

◆ To save a User Song to USB ﬂash memory ➔ page 99.

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

From the SONG SELECT display select the user song

(031–035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer

than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

● To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],

[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded

tracks (the border around the track number will appear in the display). You

can also mute previously recorded tracks (the border around the track

number disappears in the display) while recording new tracks.

● To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

● Data that cannot be recorded

• Split voice

• The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

Time signature, Style number, Style volume

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

• If you only want to clear a spe-

ciﬁc track from a user song use

the Track Clear function.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

Press and hold

Record Your Own Performance

64 Owner’s Manual

Press the [+] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the song is being cleared.

This function lets you delete a speciﬁed track from a user song.

From the SONG SELECT display select the user song

(031–035) you want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],

[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the track is being cleared.

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

Hold for longer

than a second

Owner’s Manual 65

Backup and Initialization

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you

want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and restores the initial default set-

tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.

■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory—panel user set-

ting, registration memory—turn the power on by pressing the power

switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed

up data will be erased and the default values restored.

■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear User Songs as well as Song, Style, and Music Database ﬁles

that have been transferred to the internal ﬂash memory from a computer,

turn the power on by pressing the power switch while simultaneously

holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest

black keys.

Backup

● The Backup Parameters

•Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume,

Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection,

Sustain, Sound Type, Chord Fingering

Initialization

Power switch

• When you execute the Flash

Clear operation, data you

have purchased will also be

cleared. Be sure to save data

you want to keep to a com-

puter.

CAUTION

Power switch

66 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Overall control is based on the following simple operations.

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

Basic Operation

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

3 Start a function.

2 Select an item or value.1 Select a basic function.3 Start a function.

Display (pages 68, 69)

Rotate counter-

clockwise to lower

the volume.

Rotate clockwise to

increase the vol-

ume.

● Volume Adjustment

Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the

instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones

plugged into the PHONES jack.

Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.

Select an auto-accompaniment style.

Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.

Basic Operation

Owner’s Manual 67

2 Use the dial to select an item or value

When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display.

You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.

■Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3 Start a function.

This is the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]

button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).

The currently selected item is high-

lighted in the display. In this example the

[VOICE] button has been pressed.

● Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value of the selected

item, or counterclockwise to

decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial

continuously to continuously

increase or decrease the value.

● [+] and [-] Buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to incre-

ment the value by 1, or press the [-]

button brieﬂy to decrement the

value by 1. Press and hold either

button to continuously increment or

decrement the value in the corre-

sponding direction.

● Number Buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song num-

ber or parameter value.

Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see

below).

Decrease Increase

Press brieﬂy

to decre-

ment.

Press brieﬂy

to incre-

ment.

Example: Song number “003”

can be entered in three ways.

•[0] → [0] → [3]

•[0] → [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

•[3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3].

● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons

When selecting a song, style, or voice,

you can use these buttons to jump to the

ﬁrst item in the next or previous cate-

gory.

The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for select-

ing categorized items, as in the example below.

Example: VOICE SELECT Display

In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if

you ﬁrst use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select

the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or

[+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly

handy when you have to select from a large number of voices.

Jump to the ﬁrst item

in the next or previ-

ous category.

The ﬁrst voice in the selected

category is selected.

Select the category shown

here.

CATEGORY button [ ] mark.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s

manual the dial is recommended for selection simply

because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection

method. Please note however, that most items or values

that can be selected using the dial can also be selected

using the [+] and [-] buttons.

Basic Operation

68 Owner’s Manual

● Display Names

All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for differ-

ent modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.

● MAIN Display

● FUNCTION Display (page 92)

The FUNCTION display provides access to 49 utility functions.

The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you

can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 67) to select 49 different groups of functions. Press the

CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the

dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.

The Displays

To Return To the MAIN Display

Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN

display.

You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the

[EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that

the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call

up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a

range of functions.

Title

Function item

Value

Basic Operation

Owner’s Manual 69

The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

MAIN Display Items

* Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on

the panel of the instrument for optimum

display legibility.

Transpose

Tempo

A-B Repeat

Appears when repeat

playback is engaged.

Measure Number

Function ON/Off Icons

Dual

Appears when the Dual Voice is

on. When this icon is showing a

second voice is “layered” on and

played with the main voice.

Split

Appears when the Split Voice is

on. When this icon is showing

different voices can be played to

the left and right of the keyboard

split point.

Performance assistant technology

Appears when the performance

assistant technology is on.

Harmony

Appears when Harmony is on.

When this icon is showing har-

mony notes will be added to the

main voice.

File Control

When this icon is showing you

can control ﬁle operations.

Chord

Display

Style (Auto-accompaniment)

Status (page 27)

Appears when the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button is pressed to turn

accompaniment on after selecting

a style. When showing the key-

board range to the left of the split

point is used for accompaniment

chord recognition.

Appears when the synchro-stop

function is engaged.

The style pattern name.

Registration Memory

Status (page 90)

Shows the selected bank

number.

Shows the memory num-

bers that contain data. A

border appears around

the selected number.

Song Track Status

(pages 60, 89)

Highlighted during user song

recording.

The track(s) selected for

recording are highlighted dur-

ing user-song recording. Only

tracks that contain data are dis-

played. A border appears

around a selected track that is

being played. No border

appears around a Muted track.

70 Owner’s Manual

Play with a Variety of Effects

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button

to turn Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again.

Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/

OFF] button for longer than a second.

The currently selected harmony type will be

displayed.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the

Effect Type List

on page 137 for

information about the available harmony types.

Try playing the keyboard with the harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony Type is different-refer to the below section

“How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as

the Effect Type List for details.

Adding Harmony

When harmony

is on the har-

mony icon will

appear in the

display.

• When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature

on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main

voice is automatically selected.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second.

The currently selected harmony type

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual

or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony

notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 10, 13

• Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo)

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the

Auto Accompaniment is on (page 27).

Keep holding

down the keys.

• Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function

Settings (page 94).

Keep holding

down the keys.

Hold down two

keys.

Reference

Owner’s Manual 71

Play with a Variety of Effects

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience.

When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you

want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on

page 138 for information about the available reverb types.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Reverb Type item.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for

information about the available reverb types.

● Adjusting the Reverb Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 93).

Adding Reverb

Reverb Type item

Selected reverb type.

72 Owner’s Manual

Play with a Variety of Effects

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Chorus Type item.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

● Adjusting the Chorus Level

You can individually adjust the amount of chorus

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 93).

Adding Chorus

Chorus Type item

Selected chorus type.

Owner’s Manual 73

Play with a Variety of Effects

DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and

Dual Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing

tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it.

Use the [DSP ON/OFF] button to turn

the DSP function on.

The indicator lights when DSP is on.

To turn DSP off, press the [DSP ON/OFF] but-

ton again.

Press and hold the [DSP ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second.

The currently selected DSP type will be dis-

played.

Use the dial to select a DSP type.

Refer to the DSP Type List on page 140 for

information about the available DSP types.

● Adjusting the DSP Level

You can individually adjust the amount of DSP that

is applied to the main and dual voices.

(See page 93).

Adding DSP

• When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice

is automatically selected.

• The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning

DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change dif-

fers depending on the selected Voice.

• The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be selected.

For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for

example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected.

This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which

replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phe-

nomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-B

Repeat function during song playback.

NOTE

DSP Type

Hold for longer

than a second

Currently selected DSP type.

74 Owner’s Manual

Play with a Variety of Effects

This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all

times, regardless of damper operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Sustain item.

The current setting is displayed.

You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons

to turn sustain on or off.

Adding Sustain

• The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the

sustain function is turned on.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 75

Handy Performance Features

You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times

for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song

playback by pressing the button just twice.

You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Touch Sensitivity

item.

The currently selected touch sensitivity will be

displayed.

Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3. Higher values

produce greater (easier) volume varia-

tion in response to keyboard dynamics

—i.e. greater sensitivity.

A setting of “4” results in a ﬁxed touch

response, or no level change no matter how

hard or how soft you play the keys.

Tap Start

Touch Response Sensitivity

Touch Sensitivity item

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

NOTE

76 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting

feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select

voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2

on page 17).

Select and play back any song (steps 1

to 3 on page 33).

Play the keyboard and remember the

sound of the voice.

If you have stopped playback at some point

during this procedure press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback again.

Use the dial to change songs, then play

the keyboard and listen to the voice.

You should hear a different keyboard voice

than you played in step 3. Watch the display

while changing songs and you will see that dif-

ferent voices are selected for each song.

One Touch Setting

Use the dial to select

voice number 000.

Owner’s Manual 77

Handy Performance Features

Select a sound type for the internal speakers from piano sound or style sound.

Press and hold the [PIANO PRESET]

button for longer than a second.

The currently selected sound type will appear.

Use the dial to select the desired Sound

Type.

Select Piano when you want to play only a

piano sound, or select Style when you want to

play a style.

This function can also be set by using the

[FUNCTION] button (see page 93).

Select a Sound Type

Hold for longer

than a second.

The currently selected

sound type.

• When using headphones the normal sound is applied.

NOTE

78 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone

increments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent

increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

Pitch Controls

Transpose item

Can be set between -12 and +12

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

Can be set between -100 and +100

Tuning item

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 79

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 26 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.

This instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the

accompaniment to match the song you are playing.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats

indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A

and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left

hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

Main A/BIntro

Auto ﬁllEnding

80 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as

shown below). For information on how to enter

chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment

Chords” on page 31.

● Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,

style playback will begin as soon as you play a

chord in the accompaniment range of the

keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start

standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START]

button again.

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on.

The indicator will ﬂash when the

synchro start standby mode will

be engaged.

The name of the selected sec-

tion—MAIN A or MAIN B—will

be displayed.

Split point

Accompaniment range

Owner’s Manual 81

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly

into the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompa-

niment stops automatically. You can have the

ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

again while the ending is playing back.

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompaniment

style will only play while you are playing chords

in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Style playback will stop when you release the

keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC

STOP] button.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

82 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

The initial default split point is key number 054 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using

the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Split point item.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7).

Setting the Split Point

021

(A-1)

024

(C0)

036

(C1)

048

(C2)

060

(C3)

072

(C4)

084

(C5)

096

(C6)

108

(C7)

Split point (054: F#2)

Main voice

Split voice

• When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point

also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

• The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played.

NOTE

•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]

button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the

item (page 92).

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 83

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord ﬁngerings recognized by the

instrument can be used (page 31).

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

auto accompaniment on after pressing the

[STYLE] button.

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

Appears when auto

accompaniment is

Accompaniment range

Adjusting the Style Volume

84 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.

The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the

root, third, and ﬁfth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,

for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the

C major scale), and G (the ﬁfth note of the C major scale).

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the

chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for

the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and

anchors the other chord notes.

The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad

is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-

tional chords, as shown below.

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create

different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by

choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).

● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord

(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the

chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a

major or ﬂatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by this instrument.)

Chord Basics

3rd

Root

Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

CM Cm Caug Cdim

Major chord

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord

Root note Chord type

Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

C7sus4

CmM7

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord Flatted 7

Minor chord Major 7

Major chord

Major 7

Minor chord Flatted 5

chord

Flatted 5

Minor 7

chord

Flatted 7

Suspended

chord

Suspended 4

Minor 7

Major 7

, suspended 4

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Minor/major 7

Owner’s Manual 85

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

■Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.

* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7

#11

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7Cm7

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7

b13

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

#11

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2 *

(

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cdim

Cdim7

(

)

(

b13

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

C7b5

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-

niment based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root

and ﬁfth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions

can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4,

aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2.

NOTE

•Inversion of the m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in

parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

NOTE

86 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

In “Play Along with a Style” on page 27 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were

detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however,

chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even

more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 31) can be

detected.

Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second to select

the function “Chord Fingering”.

Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard

Hold for longer

than a second

Owner’s Manual 87

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.

It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the LESSON [START]

button for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the

“G” key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in

the section of the keyboard labeled

“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The notes you should play for

the speciﬁed chord (root note and

chord type) are shown in the display,

both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord,

press the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display ﬂash.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

Hold for longer

than a second

Notation of chord Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only

by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when

specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after

pressing the root note.

• Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand

notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the per-

formance assistant technology feature.

NOTE

88 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the

start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat

playback.

Play the song (page 32) and press the

[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning

of the section you want to repeat (the

“A” point).

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-

ond time at the end of the section you

want to repeat (the “B” point).

The speciﬁed A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

Song Volume

Can be set between 000 and 127

Song volume item

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

NOTE

A-B Repeat

• Repeat start and end points cannot be speciﬁed within the same

measure While the song is stopped.

• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-

back.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song

press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 89

Song Settings

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.

You can mute individual tracks and play the muted

part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute

tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To

mute a track, press the appropriate track button

(TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same but-

ton a second time to disengage track muting.

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.

Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simul-

taneously so that “LR” appears in the

upper right corner of the MAIN display.

Select the song and play it.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MEL-

ODY L) display will appear so you can select

the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the

[VOICE] button alternates between VOICE

SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L.

Use the dial to select the voice.

As you select different melody voices, only the

melody voice changes while the song will

remain the same.

Muting Independent Song Parts

Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted.

No track number ... no data.

Track number without border

... track contains data but is muted.

Change the Melody Voice

Hold for longer

than a second

90 Owner’s Manual

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of two setups each).

Set the panel controls as required—

select a voice, accompaniment style,

etc.

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A

bank number will appear in the display

when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a bank number from 1 to

Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]

button while holding the [MEMORY/

BANK] button to store the current panel

settings to the speciﬁed registration

memory.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display in order to check the bank and registra-

tion memory numbers.

8 Banks

Memory 1

Up to 16 presets (eight

banks of two each) can

be memorized.

Memory 2

Saving to the Registration Memory

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-

back.

NOTE

Bank number

•You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration

memory button into USB ﬂash memory as the user ﬁle or to a com-

puter as the backup ﬁle.

NOTE

• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains

data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

NOTE

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-

tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 91

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A

bank number will appear in the display

when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select bank you want to recall.

You can check whether the panel settings are

stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by press-

ing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]

or [2], containing the settings you want

to recall. The panel controls will be

instantly set accordingly.

Recalling a Registration Memory

Bank number

● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-

tion Memory

• Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,

Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),

Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering

• Voice settings

Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,

Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP

Level),

Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice

number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level, DSP Level),

Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,

Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Level, Chorus Level)

• Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type,

Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type

• Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,

Harmony Volume

• Other settings

Transpose

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when

using the Song features.

92 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 49 function parameters in all.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name and adjust as required.

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 93.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s

display name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/

OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will

cancel the selection.

Some Function settings are stored in memory

as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup

Parameters” on page 65 for information on the

function settings that are stored on the instru-

ment.

To restore all initial factor default settings per-

form the “Backup Clear” procedure described

in the “Initialization” section on page 65.

Selecting and Setting Functions

Previous itemFunction category Next item

The selected function

Value

Direct numeric

entry.

•Increment value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrement value by 1.

• OFF

• Cancel

Press simultaneously to

recall the default setting.

Owner’s Manual 93

The Functions

● Function Setting List

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

VOLUME

Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

OVERALL

Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.

Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Split Point 021(A-1)–108(C7)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in

other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)

voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are

automatically set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity

1(Soft), 2(Medium),

3(Hard), 4 (Off)

Determines the sensitivity of the feature.

Chord Fingering

1(Multi Finger),

2(FullKeyboard)

Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal

chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In

the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard

will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well.

MAIN VOICE

Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results

in the sound being panned full right.

Main Reverb Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Main Chorus Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.

DUAL VOICE

Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results

in the sound being panned full right.

Dual Reverb Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Dual Chorus Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect.

SPLIT VOICE

Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results

in the sound being panned full right.

Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

Split Chorus Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

EFFECT

Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off. (See the list on page 138)

Chorus Type 01–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off. (See the list on page 139)

DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type, including off. (See the list on page 140)

Sustain ON/OFF

Determines whether or not sustain is always applied to the MAIN/DUAL

voices. It is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. (page

74)

Sound Type Piano/Style

Determines the sound type, optimizing it either for a simple, pure piano

sound, or for a wide, dynamic multi-instrument style sound.

94 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

*All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously.

(The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

HARMONY

Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 137)

Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

PAT P.A.T. Type

CHORD,

CHORD/FREE,

MELODY,

CHORD/MELODY

Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list

on page 39)

PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 105).

MIDI

Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone

generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 105)

External Clock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock

(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 105)

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is

transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF

Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

Initial Setup YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to

send, or press [-] to cancel.

METRONOME

Time Signature -

Numerator

01–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature -

Denominator

2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Bell ON/OFF Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF).

Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

SCORE Quantize

1(1/4 note),

2(1/4 note triplet),

3(1/8 note),

4(1/8 note triplet),

5(1/16 note),

6(1/16 note triplet),

7(1/32 note),

8(1/32 note triplet)

Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by

adjusting the timing of the notes.

This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For

example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you

should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this

value will not be shown in the score.

LESSON

Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting

is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.

Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is

effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer.

Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

UTILITY Demo Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON,

the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.

LANGUAGE Language English/Japanese

Determines the display language for the demo displays, song ﬁle names,

lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are

displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the ﬁle names are

displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language

setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting

exists, the setting here is used.

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

Owner’s Manual 95

Saving and Loading Data

USB ﬂash memory is a memory medium used for storing data.

When a USB ﬂash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,

registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. USB ﬂash mem-

ory can also be used to transfer Song, Style, and Music Database ﬁles to the instru-

ment, where they can be selected and used in the same way as the internal data.

In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB ﬂash

memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.

Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO

DEVICE terminal” section on page 96.

Connect a USB ﬂash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful

to insert it with the proper orientation.

Check that the ﬁle control icon is shown

in the MAIN display.

You can go to the FILE CONTROL display

from which you can access ﬁle operations by

pressing the [MENU] button from this display.

(Do not press this button now, but only when

instructed to in the sections below.)

Connecting a USB Flash Memory

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog)

sometimes appears on the display to facilitate

operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 112

for an explanation of each message.

Menu Reference Page

Format 97

User File Save 98

User Song Save 99

Load 100

USB Delete 101

User Delete 102

File Control Icon

Appears while the

memory device is

being mounted.

• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE

CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related

to ﬁle functions will be active.

NOTE

• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following

cases:

• During style or song playback.

• During a lesson.

• While data is being loaded from a USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

96 Owner’s Manual

Saving and Loading Data

■ Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to

handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.

● Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive)

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please

visit the following web page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

● Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE

terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is

appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-

tion.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

● Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you

can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as

well as read data from the connected device.

The number of USB storage device to be used

Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page

97).

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device

or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,

make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure that

the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save

and Delete operations).

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data.

NOTE

• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot

be used.

NOTE

• Do not close the key cover when a USB device is connected to

the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Doing so can damage the USB

device.

CAUTION

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-

ment, they cannot be used for saving data.

NOTE

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing data.

Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain

important data.

CAUTION

•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.

Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freez-

ing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data

(such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or

is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connec-

tion), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the

media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either

device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both

devices.

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 97

Saving and Loading Data

New USB ﬂash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument.

After connecting the USB ﬂash memory

to be formatted to the instrument’s USB

TO DEVICE terminal, check that the

icon is showing in the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Format item.

The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button and the

display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can press the [-] button at this point to can-

cel the operation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the format operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Formatting USB Flash Memory

• If you format a USB ﬂash memory that already contains data, all of

the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data

when using the format function.

CAUTION

• Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display

the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the

power or remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

NOTE

98 Owner’s Manual

Saving and Loading Data

This operation saves Registration Memory data as a “User File” to a USB ﬂash memory device. The User

File name will have a “.usr” extension which will not appear in the instrument’s display.

Make sure that a properly formatted

USB ﬂash memory has been properly

connected to the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is

showing in the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the Regist Save item.

A default ﬁle name will automatically be cre-

ated.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor

will appear below the ﬁrst character in

the ﬁle name.

Change the ﬁle name as necessary.

• The [-] button moves the cursor to the left,

and the [0] button moves it to the right.

• Use the dial to select a character for the cur-

rent cursor location.

• The [+] button deletes the character at the

cursor location.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the save operation

will begin.

The ﬁle will be stored to the USER FILE folder

in the USB ﬂash memory.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory

● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a ﬁle that already exists

on the USB ﬂash memory, use the dial or the

[+] and [-] buttons to select the ﬁle, then skip

ahead to step 6.

• Up to 100 user ﬁles can be saved to a single USB ﬂash memory.

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

• If there is not enough capacity left on the USB ﬂash memory to save

the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you

will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted ﬁles from the USB

ﬂash memory to make more memory available (page 101), or use a

different USB ﬂash memory.

• Refer to the “Messages” list on page 112 for other possible errors

that might prevent you from completing the operation.

NOTE

Cursor

Cursor right

Delete characterCursor left

The dial selects

characters

• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If an existing ﬁlename is speciﬁed the display prompts you for conﬁr-

mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the ﬁle, or [-]

to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will

depend on the condition of the USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 99

Saving and Loading Data

This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031–035) to USB ﬂash memory.

Make sure that a properly formatted

USB ﬂash memory has been properly

connected to the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is

showing in the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the User Song Save item.

The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will

be highlighted.

Use the dial to select the source user

song.

You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-

neously to select the ﬁrst user song.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The DESTINATION SONG will be high-

lighted, and a default name will automatically

be created.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A cursor will appear below the ﬁrst character in

the ﬁle name.

Change the ﬁle name as necessary.

Refer to “Saving Registration Memory data to

USB Flash Memory” on page 98 for ﬁlename

entry.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the save operation

will begin.

The user song will be stored to the USER FILE

folder in the USB ﬂash memory.

A message will appear on the display

to inform you that the operation has

ﬁnished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory

● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a ﬁle that already exists

on the USB ﬂash memory, use the dial or the

[+] and [-] buttons to select the ﬁle, then skip

ahead to step 7.

The source user song name.

The name of the ﬁle to

be saved

Cursor

• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If an existing ﬁlename is speciﬁed the display prompts you for conﬁr-

mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the ﬁle, or [-]

to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will

depend on the condition of the USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

100 Owner’s Manual

Saving and Loading Data

User ﬁles as well as Style, Song, and Music Database ﬁles residing on a USB ﬂash memory can be loaded

into the instrument.

With the USB ﬂash memory containing

the ﬁle you want to load connected to

the USB TO DEVICE connector, check

that the File Control icon is shown in

the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the Load item.

Use the dial to select the ﬁle you want

to load.

All user ﬁles in the USB ﬂash memory will be

displayed ﬁrst, followed by the style ﬁles, song

ﬁles and music database ﬁles.

Files must be located in the “User Files” folder

in the USB ﬂash memory. Files located outside

of that folder will not be recognized.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the load operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the load operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory

• If you load a User File registration memory data will be overwritten

by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB ﬂash

memory before loading data that will overwrite it.

CAUTION

• Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 101

Saving and Loading Data

This procedure deletes User, Style, Song, and Music Database ﬁles from a USB ﬂash memory.

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory

containing the ﬁle(s) you want to delete

has been properly connected to the

instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,

and that the icon is showing in the

MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the USB Delete item.

Use the dial to select the ﬁle you want

to delete.

All User ﬁles in the USB ﬂash memory will be

displayed ﬁrst, followed by the style ﬁles, song

ﬁles and music database ﬁles.

Files must be located in the “User Files” folder

in the USB ﬂash memory. Files located outside

of that folder will not be recognized.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the delete operation at this

point by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the delete operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory

• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display

the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

NOTE

102 Owner’s Manual

Saving and Loading Data

This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style, Song, and Music Database ﬁles transferred from an

external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the preset data.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the User Delete item.

Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB

ﬂash memory is connected to the instrument.

Use the dial to select the ﬁle you want

to delete.

All user songs will be displayed ﬁrst, followed

by the song, style and music database ﬁles.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the delete operation at this

point by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the delete operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory

containing the ﬁle you want to play has

been properly connected to the instru-

ment’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and

that the icon is showing in the MAIN

display.

Press the [SONG], [STYLE] or [MUSIC

DATABASE] button. Files of the corre-

sponding type will be displayed.

Use the dial to select the ﬁle you want

to play.

Play the selected ﬁle in the same way

the internal ﬁles are played: press the

[START/STOP] button, or play on the

keyboard.

Delete User Data from the Instrument

• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display

the operation cannot be canceled.

CAUTION

Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory

• In order to play data copied to a USB ﬂash memory from a com-

puter or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB

ﬂash memory’s root directory or a ﬁrst-level/second-level folder in

the root directory.

Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level

folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument.

USB ﬂash memory (Root)

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Can be selected/played.

Cannot be selected/played.

Song

File

IMPORTANT

Owner’s Manual 103

Connections

q USB TO DEVICE terminal

This terminal allows connection to USB stor-

age devices. Refer to “Precautions when using

the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 96.

w USB TO HOST terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a per-

sonal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-

sonal Computer” on page 104 for more

information.

Connectors

USB

TO HOST

104 Owner’s Manual

Connections

The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.

● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 105).

● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 107).

The connection procedure is as follows:

Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-

puter.

The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.

Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on

the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”.

Connect the USB terminal of the computer to

the USB terminal on the instrument using an

AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sepa-

rately).

The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft

Downloader application that allows you to transfer

song ﬁles from your computer to the instrument’s

ﬂash memory. For instructions about how to install

Musicsoft Downloader (refer to included “Acces-

sory CD-ROM Installation Guide”) and how to

transfer song ﬁles (refer to page 107).

■ Precautions when using the USB TO

HOST terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB TO

HOST terminal, make sure to observe the follow-

ing points. Failing to do so risks freezing the com-

puter and corrupting or losing the data. If the

computer or the instrument freezes, restart the

application software or the computer OS, or turn

the power to the instrument off then on again.

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB

TO HOST

USB cable

Computer

USB TO HOST

terminal

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal,

exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus-

pended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-

puter to the USB TO HOST terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument

on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO

HOST] terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the computer.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-

ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard

or play back a song, etc.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should

wait for six seconds or more between these operations:

(1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or

(2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

CAUTION

Owner’s Manual 105

Connections

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-

puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance

data.

■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the item you want to change its

value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

USB

TO HOST

USB cable

USB TO HOST terminal

USB terminal

Computer

Item Range/Settings Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal

tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when

local control is off.

External Clock ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to

a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or

not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

• If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be

caused by Local Control being set to off.

NOTE

• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an

external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start.

NOTE

106 Owner’s Manual

Connections

■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when

you want to transfer performance data between the

computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item

can conveniently make multiple settings for you in

one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,

PC2, and OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring

song or backup ﬁles between the computer and the

instrument.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-

book.

Press and hold the [DEMO] button for

longer than a second so that the PC

Mode item appears.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on

your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the

panel.

■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To use the remote control functions, simulta-

neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-

board (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate

key (shown below).

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

Hold for longer

than a second.

• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,

song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.

NOTE

•You can also access the PC Mode item by ﬁrst pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate it (page 92).

NOTE

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

A-1

A#-1

C7: Fast forward

B6: Start

A6: Stop

G6: Rewind

F6: Top (move to the begin-

ning of the song)

E6: Metronome ON/OFF

• Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2

mode.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 107

Connections

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to ﬁrst send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY

[] and [ ]

buttons

to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]

to cancel.

Songs, styles, or Music Database ﬁles residing on a

computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be trans-

ferred to the instrument. Backup ﬁle can also be

transferred from the instrument to the computer

and back.

In order to transfer ﬁles between your computer

and the instrument you will need to install the

Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-

MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM

on your computer. Refer to the included “Acces-

sory CD-ROM Installation Guide” for installation

details.

■With the Musicsoft

Downloader You Can.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● Transfer ﬁles from the computer to the instru-

ment’s ﬂash memory.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 108.

The procedure for transferring songs included

on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-

puter to the instrument is given as an example.

● Backup ﬁle can be transferred from the instru-

ment to a computer and back.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 109.

Initial Send

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument

● Data that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument.

• Data Capacity: 1895KB

502 ﬁles total for the Song, Style and Music

Database.

• Data Format

Song: .mid SMF format 0/1

Style: .sty

Music Database: .mfd

Backup File: 09DP88.BUP

● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one

of the most common and widely compatible

sequence formats used for storing sequence

data. There are two variations: Format 0 and

Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are

compatible with SMF Format 0, and most

commercially available MIDI sequence data is

provided in SMF Format 0.

Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.

108 Owner’s Manual

Connections

■Use Musicsoft Downloader

To Transfer Songs From the

Accessory CD-ROM To the

Instrument’s ﬂash memory

● ● ● ● ●

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM

Installation Guide”).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader

application and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the

drop-down menu that appears. Double-

click the “SampleData” Folder on the

window. Select the ﬁle from the “Song-

Data” Folder you want to transfer to the

instrument, and click “Open”.

At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-

base ﬁle on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer

it to the instrument in the same way as a song ﬁle.

A copy of the selected MIDI song ﬁle

will appear in the “List of ﬁles stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at

the bottom of the window to specify the desti-

nation for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and

then “Flash memory”.

After selecting the ﬁle in the “List of

ﬁles stored temporarily”, click the

downward [Move] button and a conﬁr-

mation message will appear. Click [OK]

and the song will be transferred from

the “List of ﬁles stored temporarily” to

the instrument’s memory.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

NOTE

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader

is running.

NOTE

q Click the CD-ROM drive

w Double-click “SampleData” Folder ➝ “Song-

Data” Folder, and click a song ﬁle.

e Click “Open”

q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”,

and then “Flash Memory”

• Files transferred to a USB ﬂash memory root directory using the

Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder

on the USB ﬂash memory device—cannot be deleted via the instru-

ment’s ﬁle control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete but-

ton to delete such ﬁles.

NOTE

Owner’s Manual 109

Connections

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

To playback a song stored in ﬂash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback.

■Transfer a Backup ﬁle from

the instrument to a computer

● ● ●

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup” ﬁles containing Registration Memory and

FUNCTION settings (page 65) to a computer. If you

click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the

Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System

Drive”, a ﬁle named “09DP88.BUP” will appear in

the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader

display. This is the backup ﬁle. For details about

how to transfer backup ﬁles using the Musicsoft

Downloader application, refer to the Online help

“Transferring Data Between the Computer and

Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the applica-

tion.

● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

In order to use songs (only SMF format 0 and 1)

transferred from a computer for lessons it is

necessary to specify which channels are to be

played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in ﬂash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the

right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the ﬁle transferred from

your computer.

NOTE

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only

will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the

memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-

appear completely when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a

copy of all important data stored on your computer.

CAUTION

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup ﬁle is transmitted/received as a single ﬁle. As a result,

all registration memory data will be overwritten every time you

transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data.

CAUTION

• Do not rename the backup ﬁle on the computer. If you do so it will

not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

CAUTION

110 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

■ For the Instrument

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-

duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it

further away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a song or style is being played

back.

Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES] jack on the bot-

tom. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is

output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 105.)

Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,

etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is

showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 87), the keys in the right

hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock” on page 105.

The style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 93) is set to an appropriate

level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-

ing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 82).

Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing

press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting

style number 131 or a style between 143–160

(Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–

160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other

parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment

range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the

Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing

back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “sto-

len”) from the accompaniment or song.

The damper pedal has no effect even when

damper pedal is pressed.

The pedal cord may not be properly connected. Make sure securely

insert the pedal cord into the [PEDAL] jack (page 116).

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple

recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the key-

board; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different

from note to note.

The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or

there are Japanese characters in the display mes-

sages.

Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to

English. (See page 16)

The appropriate display does not appear when the

[SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or

[VOICE] button is pressed.

Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return

to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.

Appendix

Owner’s Manual 111

Troubleshooting

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is

played.

Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.

The ACMP indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when

you are going to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their

type. Types 01–10, 13 function when style playback is on, chords are

played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is

played in the right-hand range. Types 15–26 will function whether

style playback is on or off. For types 23–26 you need to play two

notes at the same time.

The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper

area of the MAIN display and the USB device

does not respond.

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of

the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

112 Owner’s Manual

Messages

LCD Message Comment

Access error!

Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the ﬂash

memory.

All Memory Clearing...

Displayed while erasing all data in the ﬂash memory. Never turn the power

off during data transmission.

Are you sure? Conﬁrms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.

Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the ﬂash memory.

Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.

Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs.

Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.

Com Mode

Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected

to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played

back.

Completed

Indicates the speciﬁed job completion such as data saving and transmis-

sion.

Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.

Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.

Delete File Displayed while deleting a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Delete OK ? Conﬁrms whether the Delete job is executed or not.

Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged.

End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.

Error! Displayed when writing has failed.

Exit.

Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropri-

ate style has been selected during style record standby.

“File information area is not large enough.”

Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total

number of ﬁles have become too many.

File is not found. Indicates there is no ﬁle.

“File too large. Loading is impossible.”

Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the ﬁle data is too

large.

Flash Clearing...

Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal

ﬂash memory.

Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Conﬁrms whether formatting the media is executed or not.

Formatting... Displayed while formatting.

Load OK ? Conﬁrms whether loading is executed or not.

Loading... Displayed while loading data.

Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.

Media capacity is full.

Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory

becomes full.

Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording.

“MIDI receive buffer overﬂow.”

Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to

proceed.

Move File Displayed while moving a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

“Now Writing...

(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise

the data may be damaged.)”

Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while

writing. Doing so may result in data loss.

Owner’s Manual 113

Messages

OverCurrent

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the

overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO

DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

Overwrite ? Conﬁrms whether overwriting is executed or not.

Please Wait...

Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying

scores and lyrics, or stopping recording.

Rename File Displayed while rewriting the ﬁle name in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Save OK ? Conﬁrms whether saving is executed or not.

Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.

Saving...

Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while

saving. Doing so may result in data loss.

Send OK? Conﬁrms whether the data transmission is executed or not.

Sending... Displayed while transmitting data.

“Since the media is in use now, this

function is not available.”

Indicates that the ﬁle control function is currently unavailable since the

media is being accessed.

Style data is too large to load. Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large.

Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconﬁrms whether each operation is executed or not.

“The limit of the media has been reached.”

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory

structure has become too complicated.

The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.

“The media is write-protected.”

Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-pro-

tected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.

“The song data is too large to be

converted to notation.”

Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too

large.

There are too many ﬁles.

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of ﬁles

exceeds the capacity.

“This function is not available now.”

Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is

executing another job.

[nnn] “ﬁle name”

Indicates the ﬁle name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the

receiving block.

LCD Message Comment

• Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages neces-

sary to be explained only.

NOTE

114 Owner’s Manual

Keyboard Stand Assembly

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the

sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Assemble the stand on a hard and ﬂat ﬂoor with ample space.

• Be sure to use the included screws only, and insert screws of the correct size in the correct hole locations. Do not use any other

screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product.

• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.

•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

CAUTION

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready

6 x 20 mm long screws (x 4)

Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items.

Bundled pedal cord inside

Foamed styrol pads

6 x 16 mm short screws (x 4)

4 x 12 mm thin screws (x 2)

4 x 20 mm tapping screws (x 4)

4 x 10 mm thin screws (x 2)

AC power cord (x 1)

Headphone hanger (x 1)

Cord holders (x 2)

Adjuster (x 1)

Owner’s Manual 115

Keyboard Stand Assembly

Attach the adjuster to C.

1-1 Align the tip of the adjuster with the screw

hole, then screw in the adjuster all the way

until it stops turning.

You will adjust the height of the adjuster in

Step 8.

1-2 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord.

Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later

in Step 7.

Attach (ﬁnger-tighten) D and E to C.

2-1 Align D and E with each end of C.

2-2 Attach D and E to C by ﬁnger-tightening the

long screws (6 x 20mm).

Attach B.

3-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and

E, then attach the upper side to D and E.

3-2 Attach the top of B to D and E by ﬁnger-tight-

ening the thin screws (4 x 12mm).

3-3 While pushing the lower outside part of D and

E towards each other, secure the bottom of B

at each end using two tapping screws (4 x

20mm).

3-4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 x

20mm) into the other two screw holes to

secure B.

3-5 While pushing D and E towards each other,

securely tighten the screws that were ﬁnger-

tightened in Step 3-2.

Secure C.

4-1 Securely tighten the screws on C that were

attached in Step 2-2.

1-1

1-2

2-2

3-2

3-5

3-3

3-4

4-1

116 Owner’s Manual

Keyboard Stand Assembly

Mount A.

5-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either

end of A when positioning it.

Secure A.

6-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and

right ends of A will project beyond D and E

equally when seen from the front.

6-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x

16mm) from the front.

Connect the pedal cord and the power

cord.

7-1 Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connec-

tor from the rear.

7-2 Attach the cord holders to B, then clip the cord

into the holders.

7-3 Use a vinyl tie to bundle the pedal cord.

7-4 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set

the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the

setting of the voltage selector which is provided in

some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V,

220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screw-

driver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct

voltage for your region appears next to the pointer

on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V

when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper

voltage has been selected, connect the AC power

cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A

plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to

match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets

in your area.

7-5 Insert the AC power cord plug into the AC

INLET.

At least 15 cm

6-1

6-2

Projection of A

• An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to

this instrument or result in improper operation.

WARNING

7-1

7-2

7-3

7-47-5

Owner’s Manual 117

Keyboard Stand Assembly

Set the adjuster.

8-1 Rotate the adjuster until it comes in ﬁrm con-

tact with the ﬂoor surface.

Attach the headphone hanger.

9-1 Install the headphone hanger using included

two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the ﬁgure.

■ Remove the protective tapes

Open the key cover and remove the protective tape

on each side of the keyboard.

■ After completing the assembly, please

check the following.

• Are there any parts left over?

➔ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors.

• Is this instrument clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

➔ Move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does this instrument make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

➔ Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step

on the pedals?

➔ Tu rn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into

the sockets?

➔ Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when

you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly dia-

grams and retighten all screws.

Hold here.

Do not hold here.

• When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the

bottom of the main unit.

Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling

can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury.

CAUTION

118 Owner’s Manual

+/– .................................................. 15, 67

........................................................ 68

0–9 .................................................. 15, 67

A-B REPEAT ................................. 15, 88

ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 15, 27

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 15, 67

DEMO ............................................ 15, 32

Dial ................................................. 15, 67

DSP ON/OFF ................................. 15, 73

DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 15, 18

EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 15, 58

EXECUTE ...................................... 15, 97

EXIT ............................................... 15, 68

FF ................................................... 15, 34

FILE CONTROL ........................... 15, 95

FUNCTION .................................... 15, 92

HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 15, 70

INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 15, 79

LCD CONTRAST ................................ 69

LESSON L, R ................................. 15, 51

LESSON START ........................... 15, 50

LYRICS .......................................... 15, 38

MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 15, 79

MASTER VOLUME ........................... 15

MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 15, 90

MENU ............................................ 15, 95

METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 15, 23

MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 15, 57

P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 15, 40, 48

PAUSE ........................................... 15, 34

PC ....................................................... 106

PEDAL ................................................. 15

PHONES .............................................. 15

PIANO RESET .............................. 15, 20

REC, 1–5, A ................................... 15, 60

REGIST. MEMORY ...................... 15, 90

REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 15, 56

REW ............................................... 15, 34

SCORE ........................................... 15, 37

SONG ............................................. 15, 33

SONG MEMORY .......................... 15, 61

SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 15, 19

STANDBY/ON .................................... 15

START/STOP ................................ 15, 67

STYLE ............................... 15, 26–30, 79

SYNC START ......................... 15, 27, 80

SYNC STOP .................................. 15, 81

TEMPO/TAP ...................... 15, 23, 34, 75

USB TO DEVICE ........................ 15, 103

USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 104

VOICE ............................................ 15, 17

A-B Repeat ...........................................88

Accessories .............................................7

ACMP ...................................................27

Auto Accompaniment Range ................27

Auto-Accompaniment ..............27, 29, 31

Backup ..........................................65, 109

Bell ........................................................25

CD-ROM ............................................144

Chord ..................................29–31, 84–85

Chord Dictionary ..................................87

Chord Fingering ..............................31, 86

Chord root .............................................87

Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............87

Chord type (performance

assistant technology) ...................39–40

Chord/Free type (performance

assistant technology) ...................39, 42

Chord/Melody type (performance

assistant technology) ...................39, 46

Chorus ...................................................72

Chorus Type .......................................139

Computer ............................104–105, 107

Default Setting ......................................92

Delete (Song Track) ..............................64

Delete (USB flash memory) ...............101

Delete (User Data) ..............................102

Delete (User Song) ...............................63

Demo ....................................................32

Demo Cancel ........................................94

Display ............................................68–69

Double-Staff Score ...............................37

Drum Kit ...............................................22

Drum Kit List ......................................132

DSP .......................................................73

DSP Type ......................................73, 140

Dual Chorus Level ................................93

Dual Octave ..........................................93

Dual Pan ...............................................93

Dual Reverb Level ................................93

Dual Voice ............................................18

Dual Volume .........................................93

Easy Chords ......................................... 31

Easy Song Arranger ............................. 58

Effect Type List ................................. 138

External Clock .............................. 94, 105

External Song ....................................... 36

File Control .......................................... 95

File Name ............................................. 98

Flash Memory ...................................... 36

Format (File Control) ........................... 97

Function ................................... 68, 92–94

Function Display .................................. 68

Grade .................................................... 53

Harmony ............................................... 70

Harmony Type ................................... 138

Harmony Volume ................................. 94

Headphones .......................................... 12

Initial Send ......................................... 107

Initialization ......................................... 65

Keyboard Out ............................... 94, 105

Keyboard Stand Assembly ................. 114

Language .............................................. 16

Lesson .................................................. 50

Load ................................................... 100

Local ............................................. 94, 105

L-Part ........................................... 94, 109

Lyric ..................................................... 38

Main Chorus Level ............................... 93

MAIN Display ...................................... 68

Main Octave ......................................... 93

Main Pan .............................................. 93

Main Reverb Level ............................... 93

Main Voice ........................................... 17

Main Volume ....................................... 93

Measure ................................................ 69

Melody ........................................... 37, 49

Index

Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order

Index

Owner’s Manual 119

Melody Score ....................................... 37

Melody type (performance

assistant technology) .................. 39, 44

Melody Voice ................................. 59, 89

Messages ............................................ 112

Metronome ........................................... 23

MIDI ................................................... 105

MIDI Data Format .................................. 7

MIDI Implementation Chart ................... 7

Music Database .................................... 57

Music Rest ............................................ 10

Mute ..................................................... 89

notation ................................................. 69

One Touch Setting ................................ 76

P.A.T. Type .................................... 39, 94

PC Mode ............................................. 106

Pedal ..................................................... 21

performance assistant technology ........ 39

Preset Song ............................... 32, 35–36

Quantize ............................................... 94

Recording ............................................. 60

Registration Memory ........................... 90

Remote control ................................... 106

Repeat ............................................. 56, 88

Reverb .................................................. 71

Reverb Type ....................................... 138

R-Part ........................................... 94, 109

Save (User File) .................................... 98

Save (User Song) .................................. 99

Score ....................................... 37, 49, 120

Single-Staff Score ................................ 37

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................. 107

Song ...................................................... 33

Song Clear ............................................ 63

Song List .............................................. 35

Song Memory ................................. 60–61

Song Out ....................................... 94, 105

Song Volume ........................................ 88

Sound Type .................................... 77, 93

Specifications ......................................144

Split Chorus Level ................................93

Split Octave ..........................................93

Split Pan ................................................93

Split Point .......................................19, 82

Split Reverb Level ................................93

Split Voice ............................................19

Split Volume .........................................93

Standard Chords ...................................31

Style ..........................................26, 29, 79

Style File .............................................100

Style List .............................................134

Style Out .......................................94, 105

Style Volume ........................................83

Sustain ............................................74, 93

Synchro Start ..................................27, 80

Synchro Stop .........................................81

Tempo .............................................34, 75

TimeSignature

(Denominator, Numerator) ...............24

Touch Response ....................................75

Touch Sensitivity ..................................75

Track .....................................................60

Track Clear ...........................................64

Transfer .......................................105, 107

Transpose ..............................................78

Troubleshooting ..................................110

Tuning ...................................................78

USB ....................................................103

USB-MIDI driver .................................11

User file ........................................98, 100

User File Save .......................................98

User Song .......................................36, 60

Voice .....................................................17

Voice List ...........................................126

XF .....................................................6, 38

XGlite .....................................................6

120 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras

This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.

Hallelujah Chorus

Song No. 9 qq

=123

(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)

Scores

Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 121

Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras

122 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Ave Maria

Song No. 10 qq

=61

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

Repeatedly Play the Same Key.

P.A.T.

Your Turn.

Type =CHORD

Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 123

Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras

124 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Nocturne op.9-2

Song No. 11 qq

=108

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

P.A.T.

Type =CHORD/FREE

Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 125

126 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regard-

less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a

number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment

is used the total number of available notes for playing on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the

Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is

exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most

recent notes have priority (last note priority).

■ Maximale Polyphonie ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von

64 Noten. Dies bedeutet, daß das Instrument unabhängig von

den aktivierten Funktionen maximal 64 Noten gleichzeitig

spielen kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten

wird von der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Ein-

satz verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der

Klaviatur verfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Das Gleiche gilt

für Split Voices und Song-Funktion. Wenn die maximale

Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am frühesten

gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten

Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority).

■ Polyphonie maximale ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Le YDP-V240 dispose d’une polyphonie maximale de 64

notes. Cela signiﬁe que l’instrument peut reproduire un nom-

bre maximal de 64 voix à la fois, indépendamment des fonc-

tions utilisées. L’accompagnement automatique fait appel à un

certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s’ensuit que lorsque

l’accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de

notes disponibles pour l’interprétation au clavier est réduit en

conséquence. Cela s’applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice

(Voix partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie

maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne produi-

sent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier sont

audibles (priorité à la dernière note).

■ Polifonía máxima ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

El instrumento tiene una polifonía máxima de 64 notas. Esto

signiﬁca que puede tocar un máximo de 64 notas a la vez,

independientemente de las funciones que se usen. El acompa-

ñamiento automático utiliza una parte de las notas disponi-

bles, de forma que cuando éste se utiliza el número de notas

disponibles se reduce proporcionalmente. Lo mismo puede

aplicarse a las funciones Split Voice (Voz de división) y Song

(Canción). Si se excede la polifonía máxima, las notas tocadas

con anterioridad se cortan y se da prioridad a las notas más

recientes (prioridad de la última nota).

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for

each voice. Use these program change numbers when

playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program change numbers are often speciﬁed as numbers

“0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system,

in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the trans-

mitted program change numbers to select the appropriate

sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program

change number 1.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have been released while the

damper pedal is held.

NOTE

• In der Voice-Liste sind für jede Voice MIDI-Programm-

wechselnummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese Pro-

grammwechselnummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über

MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern.

• Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direkt mit

den MIDI-Programmwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127

zusammen. Das bedeutet: Programmnummern und Pro-

grammwechsel-Nummern unterscheiden sich mit einem

Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überlegungen daran.

• Einige Voices klingen fortwährend, oder klingen sehr

lange aus, nachdem die Tasten losgelassen wurden, wäh-

rend das Dämpferpedal gedrückt ist.

HINWEIS

• La liste des voix comporte des numéros de changement

de programme MIDI pour chaque voix. Utilisez ces der-

niers pour commander le YDP-V240 à partir d’un périphé-

rique MIDI.

• Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux

numéros de changement de programme MIDI

000 à 127. Cela signiﬁe que les numéros de programme

et les numéros de changement de programme sont déca-

lés de 1. N’oubliez pas de tenir compte de cet écart.

• Certaines voix peuvent être entendues en continu ou pré-

senter une longue atténuation une fois que les notes ont

été relâchées et tandis que la pédale de maintien est

enfoncée.

NOTE

• La lista de voces incluye números de cambio de programa

MIDI para cada voz. Utilice estos números de cambio de

programa cuando toque el instrumento a través del MIDI

desde un dispositivo externo.

• Números de programa de 001 a 128 directamente relacio-

nados con los números de cambio de programa MIDI de

000 a 127. Esto quiere decir que los números de pro-

grama y los números de cambio de programa diﬁeren en

un valor de 1, elemento que se debe tener en cuenta.

• Después de soltar las notas, algunas voces podrían sonar

de forma continuada o presentar una larga disminución

mientras se mantiene pisado el pedal amortiguador.

NOTA

Voice List

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 127

● Panel Voice List / Verzeichnis der Bedienfeld-

Voices / Liste des voix de panneau /

Lista de voces del panel

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

001 000 122 001 Natural! Grand

002 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano

003 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano

004 000 112 001 Grand Piano

005 000 112 002 Bright Piano

006 000 112 007 Harpsichord

007 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano

008 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano

009 000 113 003 CP 80

E.PIANO

010 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

011 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano

012 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano

013 000 120 005 Phase Electric Piano

014 000 113 006 Hyper Tines

015 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano

016 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano

017 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano

018 000 113 005 Tremolo Electric Piano

019 000 114 008 E.Clavichord

020 000 112 008 Clavi

021 000 113 008 WahClavi

ORGAN

022 000 118 019 Cool! Organ

023 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ

024 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1

025 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2

026 000 112 019 Rock Organ

027 000 114 019 Purple Organ

028 000 112 018 Click Organ

029 000 116 017 Bright Organ

030 000 127 019 Theater Organ

031 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ

032 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ

033 000 113 020 Chapel Organ

034 000 112 020 Church Organ

035 000 112 021 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

036 000 112 022 Musette Accordion

037 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion

038 000 113 024 Bandoneon

039 000 113 023 Modern Harp

040 000 112 023 Harmonica

GUITAR

041 000 112 025 Classical Guitar

042 000 112 026 Folk Guitar

043 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar

044 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar

045 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar

046 000 112 028 Clean Guitar

047 000 113 027 Octave Guitar

048 000 112 029 Muted Guitar

049 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar

050 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar

BASS

051 000 112 034 Finger Bass

052 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass

053 000 112 035 Pick Bass

054 000 112 036 Fretless Bass

055 000 112 037 Slap Bass

056 000 112 039 Synth Bass

057 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass

058 000 113 040 Dance Bass

STRINGS

059 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra

060 000 112 049 String Ensemble

061 000 112 050 Chamber Strings

062 000 113 050 Slow Strings

063 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings

064 000 112 051 Synth Strings

065 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings

066 000 112 041 Violin

067 000 112 043 Cello

068 000 112 044 Contrabass

069 000 112 047 Harp

070 000 112 106 Banjo

071 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

072 000 112 053 Choir

073 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble

074 000 112 055 Air Choir

075 000 112 054 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

076 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax

077 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax

078 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet

079 000 118 067 Growl Sax

080 000 112 067 Tenor Sax

081 000 112 066 Alto Sax

082 000 112 065 Soprano Sax

083 000 112 068 Baritone Sax

084 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax

085 000 112 072 Clarinet

086 000 112 069 Oboe

087 000 112 070 English Horn

088 000 112 071 Bassoon

TRUMPET

089 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet

090 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone

091 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet

092 000 112 057 Trumpet

093 000 112 058 Trombone

094 000 113 058 Trombone Section

095 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet

096 000 112 061 French Horn

097 000 112 059 Tuba

BRASS

098 000 112 062 Brass Section

099 000 113 062 Big Band Brass

100 000 113 063 80’s Brass

101 000 119 062 Mellow Horns

102 000 114 063 Techno Brass

103 000 112 063 Synth Brass

FLUTE

104 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute

105 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute

106 000 112 074 Flute

107 000 112 073 Piccolo

108 000 112 076 Pan Flute

109 000 112 075 Recorder

110 000 112 080 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

111 000 112 081 Square Lead

112 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead

113 000 115 082 Analogon

114 000 119 082 Fargo

115 000 112 099 Star Dust

116 000 112 086 Voice Lead

117 000 112 101 Brightness

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

128 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List / Liste

der XGlite-Voices/optionale XGlite-Voices* / Voix

XGlite/liste des voix* XGlite en option / Lista de

voces de XGlite/voces opcionales de XGlite*

SYNTH PAD

118 000 118 089 SweetHeaven

119 000 112 092 Xenon Pad

120 000 112 095 Equinox

121 000 112 089 Fantasia

122 000 113 090 Dark Moon

123 000 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

124 000 112 012 Vibraphone

125 000 112 013 Marimba

126 000 112 014 Xylophone

127 000 112 115 Steel Drums

128 000 112 009 Celesta

129 000 112 011 Music Box

130 000 112 015 Tubular Bells

131 000 112 048 Timpani

DRUM KITS

132 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1

133 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2

134 127 000 009 Room Kit

135 127 000 017 Rock Kit

136 127 000 025 Electronic Kit

137 127 000 026 Analog Kit

138 127 000 113 Dance Kit

139 127 000 033 Jazz Kit

140 127 000 041 Brush Kit

141 127 000 049 Symphony Kit

142 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1

143 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG PIANO

144 000 000 001 Grand Piano

145 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP

146 000 040 001 Piano Strings

147 000 041 001 Dream

148 000 000 002 Bright Piano

149 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP

150 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano

151 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP

152 000 032 003 Detuned CP80

153 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano

154 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

155 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1

156 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP

157 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1

158 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2

*159 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP

160 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2

161 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano

162 000 000 007 Harpsichord

163 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP

164 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2

165 000 000 008 Clavi

166 000 001 008 Clavi KSP

XG CHROMATIC

167 000 000 009 Celesta

168 000 000 010 Glockenspiel

169 000 000 011 Music Box

170 000 064 011 Orgel

171 000 000 012 Vibraphone

172 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP

173 000 000 013 Marimba

174 000 001 013 Marimba KSP

175 000 064 013 Sine Marimba

176 000 097 013 Balimba

177 000 098 013 Log Drums

178 000 000 014 Xylophone

179 000 000 015 Tubular Bells

180 000 096 015 Church Bells

181 000 097 015 Carillon

182 000 000 016 Dulcimer

183 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2

184 000 096 016 Cimbalom

185 000 097 016 Santur

XG ORGAN

186 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ

187 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ

188 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

189 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

190 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

191 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

192 000 040 017 16+2'2/3

193 000 064 017 Organ Bass

194 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

195 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ

196 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2

197 000 000 018 Percussive Organ

198 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ

199 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ

200 000 033 018 Light Organ

201 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2

202 000 000 019 Rock Organ

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 129

203 000 064 019 Rotary Organ

204 000 065 019 Slow Rotary

205 000 066 019 Fast Rotary

206 000 000 020 Church Organ

207 000 032 020 Church Organ 3

208 000 035 020 Church Organ 2

209 000 040 020 Notre Dame

210 000 064 020 Organ Flute

211 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute

212 000 000 021 Reed Organ

213 000 040 021 Puff Organ

214 000 000 022 Accordion

215 000 000 023 Harmonica

216 000 032 023 Harmonica 2

217 000 000 024 Tango Accordion

218 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2

XG GUITAR

219 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar

220 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

221 000 096 025 Ukulele

222 000 000 026 Steel Guitar

223 000 035 026 12-string Guitar

224 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar

225 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

226 000 096 026 Mandolin

227 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar

228 000 032 027 Jazz Amp

229 000 000 028 Clean Guitar

230 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar

231 000 000 029 Muted Guitar

232 000 040 029 Funk Guitar

233 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar

234 000 045 029 Jazz Man

235 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar

236 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch

237 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar

238 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar

239 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2

240 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics

241 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback

242 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2

XG BASS

243 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass

244 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm

245 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

246 000 000 034 Finger Bass

247 000 018 034 Finger Dark

248 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

249 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass

250 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2

251 000 065 034 Modulated Bass

252 000 000 035 Pick Bass

253 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass

254 000 000 036 Fretless Bass

255 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2

256 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3

257 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4

258 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1

259 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass

260 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2

261 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap

262 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1

263 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass

264 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2

265 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass

266 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass

267 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

*268 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark

269 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass

270 000 041 040 DX Bass

XG STRINGS

271 000 000 041 Violin

272 000 008 041 Slow Violin

273 000 000 042 Viola

274 000 000 043 Cello

275 000 000 044 Contrabass

276 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings

277 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings

278 000 040 045 Suspense Strings

279 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings

280 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp

281 000 040 047 Yang Chin

282 000 000 048 Timpani

XG ENSEMBLE

283 000 000 049 Strings 1

284 000 003 049 Stereo Strings

285 000 008 049 Slow Strings

286 000 035 049 60’s Strings

287 000 040 049 Orchestra

288 000 041 049 Orchestra 2

289 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra

290 000 045 049 Velocity Strings

291 000 000 050 Strings 2

292 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings

293 000 008 050 Legato Strings

294 000 040 050 Warm Strings

295 000 041 050 Kingdom

296 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1

297 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2

298 000 000 053 Choir Aahs

299 000 003 053 Stereo Choir

300 000 032 053 Mellow Choir

301 000 040 053 Choir Strings

302 000 000 054 Voice Oohs

303 000 000 055 Synth Voice

304 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2

305 000 041 055 Choral

306 000 064 055 Analog Voice

307 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit

308 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2

309 000 064 056 Impact

XG BRASS

310 000 000 057 Trumpet

311 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet

312 000 000 058 Trombone

313 000 018 058 Trombone 2

314 000 000 059 Tuba

315 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet

316 000 000 061 French Horn

317 000 006 061 French Horn Solo

318 000 032 061 French Horn 2

319 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra

320 000 000 062 Brass Section

321 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section

322 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1

323 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass

324 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2

325 000 018 064 Soft Brass

326 000 041 064 Choir Brass

XG REED

327 000 000 065 Soprano Sax

328 000 000 066 Alto Sax

329 000 040 066 Sax Section

330 000 000 067 Tenor Sax

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

130 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

331 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax

332 000 000 068 Baritone Sax

333 000 000 069 Oboe

334 000 000 070 English Horn

335 000 000 071 Bassoon

336 000 000 072 Clarinet

XG PIPE

337 000 000 073 Piccolo

338 000 000 074 Flute

339 000 000 075 Recorder

340 000 000 076 Pan Flute

341 000 000 077 Blown Bottle

342 000 000 078 Shakuhachi

343 000 000 079 Whistle

344 000 000 080 Ocarina

XG SYNTH LEAD

345 000 000 081 Square Lead

346 000 006 081 Square Lead 2

347 000 008 081 LM Square

348 000 018 081 Hollow

349 000 019 081 Shroud

350 000 064 081 Mellow

351 000 065 081 Solo Sine

352 000 066 081 Sine Lead

353 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead

354 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2

355 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth

356 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth

357 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth

358 000 020 082 Big Lead

359 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog

360 000 000 083 Calliope Lead

361 000 065 083 Pure Lead

362 000 000 084 Chiff Lead

363 000 000 085 Charang Lead

364 000 064 085 Distorted Lead

365 000 000 086 Voice Lead

366 000 000 087 Fifths Lead

367 000 035 087 Big Five

368 000 000 088 Bass & Lead

369 000 016 088 Big & Low

370 000 064 088 Fat & Perky

371 000 065 088 Soft Whirl

XG SYNTH PAD

372 000 000 089 New Age Pad

373 000 064 089 Fantasy

374 000 000 090 Warm Pad

375 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad

376 000 000 092 Choir Pad

377 000 066 092 Itopia

378 000 000 093 Bowed Pad

379 000 000 094 Metallic Pad

380 000 000 095 Halo Pad

381 000 000 096 Sweep Pad

XG SYNTH EFFECTS

382 000 000 097 Rain

383 000 065 097 African Wind

384 000 066 097 Carib

385 000 000 098 Sound Track

386 000 027 098 Prologue

387 000 000 099 Crystal

388 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp

389 000 014 099 Popcorn

390 000 018 099 Tiny Bells

391 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel

392 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes

393 000 041 099 Clear Bells

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

394 000 042 099 Chorus Bells

395 000 065 099 Soft Crystal

396 000 070 099 Air Bells

397 000 071 099 Bell Harp

398 000 072 099 Gamelimba

399 000 000 100 Atmosphere

400 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere

401 000 019 100 Hollow Release

402 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano

403 000 064 100 Nylon Harp

404 000 065 100 Harp Vox

405 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad

406 000 000 101 Brightness

407 000 000 102 Goblins

408 000 064 102 Goblins Synth

409 000 065 102 Creeper

410 000 067 102 Ritual

411 000 068 102 To Heaven

412 000 070 102 Night

413 000 071 102 Glisten

414 000 096 102 Bell Choir

415 000 000 103 Echoes

416 000 000 104 Sci-Fi

XG WORLD

417 000 000 105 Sitar

418 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar

419 000 035 105 Sitar 2

420 000 097 105 Tamboura

421 000 000 106 Banjo

422 000 028 106 Muted Banjo

423 000 096 106 Rabab

424 000 097 106 Gopichant

425 000 098 106 Oud

426 000 000 107 Shamisen

427 000 000 108 Koto

428 000 096 108 Taisho-kin

429 000 097 108 Kanoon

430 000 000 109 Kalimba

431 000 000 110 Bagpipe

432 000 000 111 Fiddle

433 000 000 112 Shanai

XG PERCUSSIVE

434 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell

435 000 096 113 Bonang

436 000 097 113 Altair

437 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs

438 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

439 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal

440 000 000 114 Agogo

441 000 000 115 Steel Drums

442 000 097 115 Glass Percussion

443 000 098 115 Thai Bells

444 000 000 116 Woodblock

445 000 096 116 Castanets

446 000 000 117 Taiko Drum

447 000 096 117 Gran Cassa

448 000 000 118 Melodic Tom

449 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2

450 000 065 118 Real Tom

451 000 066 118 Rock Tom

452 000 000 119 Synth Drum

453 000 064 119 Analog Tom

454 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion

455 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal

XG SOUND EFFECTS

456 000 000 121 Fret Noise

457 000 000 122 Breath Noise

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 131

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.

Voice-Nummern mit einem Stern (*) sind optionale Xglite-Voices.

Le numéro de voix porteur d’un astérisque (*) est une voix XGlite

en option.

El número de voz con un asterisco (*) es una voz opcional de

XGlite.

458 000 000 123 Seashore

459 000 000 124 Bird Tweet

460 000 000 125 Telephone Ring

461 000 000 126 Helicopter

462 000 000 127 Applause

463 000 000 128 Gunshot

464 064 000 001 Cutting Noise

465 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2

466 064 000 004 String Slap

467 064 000 017 Flute Key Click

468 064 000 033 Shower

469 064 000 034 Thunder

470 064 000 035 Wind

471 064 000 036 Stream

472 064 000 037 Bubble

473 064 000 038 Feed

474 064 000 049 Dog

475 064 000 050 Horse

476 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2

477 064 000 056 Maou

478 064 000 065 Phone Call

479 064 000 066 Door Squeak

480 064 000 067 Door Slam

481 064 000 068 Scratch Cut

482 064 000 069 Scratch Split

483 064 000 070 Wind Chime

484 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2

485 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition

486 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal

487 064 000 083 Car Passing

488 064 000 084 Car Crash

489 064 000 085 Siren

490 064 000 086 Train

491 064 000 087 Jet Plane

492 064 000 088 Starship

493 064 000 089 Burst

494 064 000 090 Roller Coaster

495 064 000 091 Submarine

496 064 000 097 Laugh

497 064 000 098 Scream

498 064 000 099 Punch

499 064 000 100 Heartbeat

500 064 000 101 Footsteps

501 064 000 113 Machine Gun

502 064 000 114 Laser Gun

503 064 000 115 Explosion

504 064 000 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

132 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de

Voice No. 132 133 134 135 136 137

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy

Snare Snappy Electro

Snare Noisy 4

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2

46 A# 134A# 0Open Rim Shot

Open Rim Shot H Short

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short

Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L

Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Open Analog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L

Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1

Crash Analog

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom

Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard

Note # and Note. For example, in “132: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”

(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played

simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each

other.)

•„ “ bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeugklang gleich „Standard Kit 1“ ist.

• Jede Perkussionsnote belegt eine Note.

• Die MIDI-Note # und Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Octave tiefer als hier

aufgeführt. Beispiel: In „132: Standard Kit 1“ entspricht die „Seq Click H“

(Note# 36/Note C1) der Note (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Mit „O“ bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie

losgelassen werden.

• Stimmen mit derselben Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) können nicht

gleichzeitig gespielt werden. (Diese Stimmen sind dazu gedacht, wechsel-

weise gespielt zu werden.)

Drum Kit List

C#1

D#1

G#1

A#1

F#1

C#0

D#0

G#0

A#0

F#0

C#2

D#2

G#2

A#2

F#2

C#3

D#3

G#3

A#3

F#3

C#4

D#4

G#4

A#4

F#4

C#5

D#5

G#5

A#5

F#5

C#6

D#6

F#6

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 133

Voice No. 132 138 139 140 141 142 143

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog

Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

String Slap Scratch Cut

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog3

Telephone Ring 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Open Analog 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog

Hand Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

Hand Cymbal Short

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

Car Passing

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Siren

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Hand Cymbal 2 Train

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

Jet Plane

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Hand Cymbal 2 Short

Starship

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H

Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

Bubble Footsteps

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

per

cussion / Lista de juegos de batería

•« » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à cel-

les de « Standard Kit 1 ».

• Chaque voix de percussion utilise une note unique.

• Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à une

octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple, dans

« 132 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1) correspond à

(Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off : pour les touches signalées par « O », l’émission de sons s’arrête

instantanément aussitôt que les touches sont relâchées.

• Les voix portant un même numéro de note alternative (*1 ... 4) ne peuvent

pas être jouées simultanément. (Elles sont en effet conçues pour être

interprétées en alternance).

•“ ” indica que el sonido de batería es el mismo que el

“Standard Kit 1”.

• Cada sonido de percusión utiliza una nota.

• La nota MIDI # y la nota son en realidad una octava menos de lo que apa-

rece en la lista. Por ejemplo, en “132: Standard Kit 1”, el “Seq Click H”

(Nota# 36/Nota C1) corresponde a (Nota# 24/Nota C0).

•Tecla desactivada: las teclas marcadas con “O” dejan de sonar en el

momento en que se sueltan.

• Los sonidos con el mismo número alterno de nota (*1 ... 4) no pueden

tocarse simultáneamente. (Están diseñados para tocarse alternativamente

el uno con el otro.)

C#1

D#1

G#1

A#1

F#1

C#0

D#0

G#0

A#0

F#0

C#2

D#2

G#2

A#2

F#2

C#3

D#3

G#3

A#3

F#3

C#4

D#4

G#4

A#4

F#4

C#5

D#5

G#5

A#5

F#5

C#6

D#6

F#6

134 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Lista de estilos

Style No. Style Name

8BEAT

1 ChartPianoPop

2 BritPopRock

3 8BeatModern

4 Cool8Beat

5 Classic8Beat

6 60’sGuitarPop

7 8BeatAdria

8 60’s8Beat

9 BubblegumPop

10 BritPopSwing

11 OffBeat

12 60’sRock

13 HardRock

14 RockShuffle

15 8BeatRock

16BEAT

16 16Beat

17 PianoPopShufle

18 PopShuffle1

19 PopShuffle2

20 GuitarPop

21 16BeatUptempo

22 KoolShuffle

23 JazzRock

24 HipHopLight

BALLAD

25 ChartPianoBld

26 PopGtrBallad

27 80’sBallad

28 PianoBallad

29 LoveSong

30 6-8ModernEP

31 6-8SlowRock

32 6-8OrchBallad

33 OrganBallad

34 PopBallad

35 16BeatBallad1

36 16BeatBallad2

DANCE

37 ClubBeat

38 Electronica

39 FunkyHouse

40 MellowHipHop

41 EuroTrance

42 Ibiza

43 DreamDance

44 TechnoPolis

45 Clubdance

46 ClubLatin

47 Garage

48 UKPop

49 HipHopGroove

50 HipShuffle

51 HipHopPop

DISCO

52 70’sDisco1

53 70’sDisco2

54 LatinDisco

55 DiscoPhilly

56 SaturdayNight

57 DiscoChocolate

58 DiscoHands

SWING&JAZZ

59 TradJazzPiano1

60 TradJazzPiano2

61 PianoBarBlues

62 BigBandFast

63 BigBandMedium

64 BigBandBallad

65 BigBandShuffle

66 JazzClub

67 Swing1

68 Swing2

69 OrchestraSwing

70 Five-Four

71 JazzBallad

72 Dixieland

73 Ragtime

74 AfroCuban

75 Charleston

R&B

76 Soul

77 DetroitPop1

78 60’sRock&Roll

79 6-8Soul

80 CrocoTwist

81 Rock&Roll

82 DetroitPop2

83 BoogieWoogie

84 ComboBoogie

85 6-8Blues

COUNTRY

86 70’sCountry

87 Country8Beat

88 CountryPop

89 CountrySwing

90 CountryBallad

91 Country2-4

92 CowboyBoogie

93 CountryShuffle

94 Bluegrass

LATIN

95 BrazilianSamba

96 BossaNova

97 PopBossa

98 Tijuana

99 DiscoLatin

100 Mambo

101 Salsa

102 Beguine

103 GuitarRumba

104 RumbaFlamenco

105 RumbaIsland

106 Reggae

BALLROOM

107 VienneseWaltz

108 EnglishWaltz

109 Slowfox

110 Foxtrot

Style No. Style Name

111 Quickstep

112 Tango

113 Pasodoble

114 Samba

115 ChaChaCha

116 Rumba

117 Jive

TRADITIONAL

118 USMarch

119 6-8March

120 GermanMarch

121 PolkaPop

122 OberPolka

123 Tarantella

124 Showtune

125 ChristmasSwing

126 ChristmasWaltz

127 ScottishReel

128 Hawaiian

WALTZ

129 ItalianWaltz

130 MariachiWaltz

131 GuitarSerenade

132 SwingWaltz

133 JazzWaltz1

134 JazzWaltz2

135 CountryWaltz

136 OberWaltzer

137 Musette

CHILDREN

138 Learning2-4

139 Learning4-4

140 Learning6-8

141 Fun 3-4

142 Fun 4-4

PIANIST

143 Stride

144 PianoBlues1

145 PianoBlues2

146 PianoRag

147 PianoRock&Roll

148 PianoBoogie

149 PianoJazzWaltz

150 PianoJazzBld

151 Arpeggio

152 Musical

153 Habanera

154 SlowRock

155 8BtPianoBallad

156 PianoMarch

157 6-8PianoMarch

158 PianoWaltz

159 PianoBeguine

160 PianoSwing

Style No. Style Name

Style List

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 135

Music Database List / Musikdatenbankliste / Liste des bases de données musicales /

Lista de la base de datos musical

MDB No. MDB Name

ALL TIME HITS

1 Jude Hey

2 New UK

3 MyLoving

4All OK

5 Buttercp

6 JustCall

7 CheepChp

8 Daddy's

9 Dance?

10 GetBack

11 GtrWheel

12 HighTide

13 IWasBorn

14 Sailing

15 BluJeans

16 Holiday

17 Imagine

18 LoveMe

19 LetItBld

20 LdyMdona

21 YelowSub

22 Marriage

23 MovinOut

24 My Shell

25 NowNever

26 DoLoveMe

27 TcktRide

28 SeeClear

29 Masachus

30 Hard Day

31 USA Pie

32 Norway

33 YesterBd

MODERN POP

34 Watches

35 SoundMPH

36 Hold Us

37 Unfound

38 NeedSome

39 PrtTmLvr

40 MoonShdw

41 NikitSng

42 Sure of

43 Off Day

44 Tell Her

45 GirlsMne

46 NeedLove

POP CLASSICS

47 Standing

48 RainLaff

49 Sunshine

50 ForNamdo

51 ThankFor

52 ManPiano

53 CoinLane

54 LovesYou

55 Tmbourin

56 Alone

57 GldField

58 Raindrop

59 SultanSw

60 Life'sWk

61 TopWorld

62 WatchGrl

POP BALLAD

63 WnderLnd

64 CanIStop

65 EvryTime

66 IvoryAnd

67 TheWorld

68 LovWoman

69 Dolannes

70 Madigan

71 Paradise

72 Whisper

BALLAD

73 AllOdds

74 AtonalFl

75 Hero

76 Woman

77 RunToYou

78 LoveOfAl

79 CndleWnd

80 Cavatina

81 Cherish

82 ToLoveMe

83 YouKnow

84 Evrythng

85 EyesOfBl

86 Hello

87 BeThere

88 FlyAway

89 LoveYou

90 NeverLet

91 JustOnce

92 IfYouGo

93 SavingAl

94 InTheDrk

95 LovePwr

96 Vision

97 Beautifl

98 AllAlone

99 Opposite

100 BeHonest

101 SayYou

102 SayNthng

103 Stranger

104 OneDay

105 TheBayou

106 ThisSong

107 Distance

108 ThisWay

109 LoveGone

110 Inspirng

111 TrueColr

ROCK & ROLL

112 ShakenUp

113 Beethovn

114 HurryLov

115 BeCruel

116 Jumping

117 Countdwn

118 SuePeggy

119 Champion

120 Jailhous

121 BlueShoe

122 Rockin24

MDB No. MDB Name

123 Shouting

124 Rock&Rll

125 HonkyTnk

OLDIES

126 Daydream

127 Sumertme

128 Diana's

129 Uptown

130 Apache

131 IGotIt

132 Tonight

133 MyPillow

134 NoRain

135 FinalDance

136 SlpnLion

137 Ghetto

138 LipsLcky

139 PrettyWm

140 TikiGtr

141 TurnThre

142 Sherry

DANCE & DISCO

143 Babylon

144 Goodbye

145 Catch22

146 DISCO

147 Survival

148 TheNavy

149 DontHide

150 Celebrat

151 LondonRU

152 10,2 Sun

153 ShakeYou

154 Believe

155 BoySumer

156 I'mSexy

157 StuffHot

SWING & JAZZ

158 Patrol

159 Charles

160 GiveLove

161 Rhythm

162 LOVE

163 LeroyBad

164 Caraban

165 Misbehav

166 Safari

167 Smiling

168 SoWhatIs

169 TimeGone

170 TasteHny

171 Sandman

172 Tunisian

173 TwoFoot

174 MyBaby

R&B

175 AsPlayed

176 BabyGrov

177 Highwy66

178 SweetCHI

179 JustU&Me

180 ManLoves

181 OurLove

182 Wish I

MDB No. MDB Name

COUNTRY

183 OnTheRd

184 Breathe

185 InMyMind

186 ContryHw

187 GreenGrs

188 EverNeed

189 Lonesome

190 Lucille

191 HomeRng

192 Tennesse

LATIN

193 Bananabt

194 DanceMng

195 DntWorry

196 Jamaica

197 FleaSpa

198 I'mPola

199 MamboJm

200 OneNote

201 PasoCani

202 SayNoMor

203 Beguine

204 Tijuana

205 Picture

ENTERTAINMENT

206 OnTheHil

207 Barnacle

208 Califrag

209 DadClock

210 DanceLd

211 DnceFire

212 BigCntry

213 Cabaret

214 OdeToJoy

215 Mi-Re-Do

216 MyPrince

217 Necesary

218 NoBuiz

219 NoisyOld

220 Sleigh

221 RockBaby

222 Magnifiq

223 Magnfcnt

224 SilentNt

225 Nabucco

226 Standing

227 SummerPl

228 Christms

229 Favorite

230 Tubbie

231 Turkish

232 12OClock

WALTZ & TRADITIONAL

233 Blk&Whte

234 CanCan

235 Charmain

236 Musicbox

237 Clementn

238 Doodah!

239 Dreamer

240 EnterRag

241 Birthday

242 MaryLamb

MDB No. MDB Name

243 Donald's

244 MoonWlz

245 MoulinHt

246 Sunshine

247 PieceOf

248 GreenSlv

249 TakeFour

250 TexRose

251 ThePolka

252 Scarboro

253 Edelweis

254 AroundWd

255 Whatever

256 Yankee's

WORLD

257 Hawaii

258 D'amor

259 ElCondor

260 GoodbyRm

261 ILandOn

262 ItalyBel

263 Cucarumb

264 Puntuali

265 Cielito

266 ItalySun

267 SantaLuc

268 Trumpetr

269 VanMass

PIANIST

270 ItalySun

271 BeGood

272 Chaie's

273 Flower

274 Frenetic

275 Highwy66

276 Leaves

277 Miload

278 Cabaret

279 Wonderfl

280 Submarin

281 Mi-Re-Do

282 MoreRhum

283 NoBuiz

284 BeatifulSn

285 OhBlah

286 Charades

287 Sally's

288 Nabucco

289 Spanish

290 SunnyStr

291 MistyFln

292 LdnBridg

293 GrndClck

294 Importnc

295 Snowman

296 Favorite

297 SugerSpn

298 Washngtn

299 ThisWay

300 ZipperD

MDB No. MDB Name

Music Database List

136 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM / Songs auf der beiliegenden CD-ROM / Morceaux

disponibles sur le CD-ROM fourni / Canciones incluidas en el CD-ROM proporcionado

The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.

Easy Song Arranger kann nur zusammen mit Songs verwendet werden, die Akkorddaten enthalten.

La fonction Easy Song Arranger ne s’utilise qu’avec des morceaux comportant des données d’accord.

La función Easy Song Arranger (arreglos sencillos de canciones) sólo puede utilizarse con canciones que incluyan datos de acordes.

File Name Song Name Composer

001Nutcr.mid Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky

002Orphe.mid “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach

003Slavo.mid Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák

004Prima.mid La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi

005Medit.mid Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet

006Guill.mid Guillaume Tell G. Rossini

007Fruhl.mid Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn

008Ungar.mid Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms

009Fruhl.mid Frühlingsstimmen J. Strauss II

010Dolly.mid Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten

011Cande.mid La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller

012Arabe.mid Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller

013Pasto.mid Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller

014Petit.mid Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller

015Innoc.mid Innocence J.F.Burgmüller

016Progr.mid Progrès J.F.Burgmüller

017Taren.mid Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller

018Cheva.mid La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller

019Etude.mid Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin

020Marci.mid Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven

021Turki.mid Turkish March W.A. Mozart

022Valse.mid Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin

023Menue.mid Menuett L. Boccherini

024Momen.mid Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert

025Enter.mid The Entertainer S. Joplin

026Prelu.mid Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach

027Violl.mid La Viollette L.Streabbog

028Angel.mid Angels Serenade Traditional

029Saraf.mid Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional

030Ameri.mid America the Beautiful S.A. Ward

031Brown.mid Little Brown Jug Traditional

032Lomon.mid Loch Lomond Traditional

033Bonni.mid My Bonnie Traditional

034Londo.mid Londonderry Air Traditional

035Banjo.mid Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster

036Vogle.mid Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional

037Lorel.mid Die Lorelei F. Silcher

038Funic.mid Funiculi Funicula L. Denza

039Turke.mid Turkey in the Straw Traditional

040Campt.mid Camptown Races S.C. Foster

041Jingl.mid Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont

042Muss.mid Muss i denn F. Silcher

043Liebe.mid Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt

044Jesu.mid Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach

045Joy.mid Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven

046Pearl.mid Pearl Fisher G. Bizet

047Gavot.mid Gavotte F.J. Gossec

048Seren.mid Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn

049Menue.mid Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach

050Canon.mid Canon in D J. Pachelbel

051Vogel.mid Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” W.A. Mozart

052Piano.mid Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven

053Surpr.mid The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn

054WildR.mid To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell

055Chans.mid Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet

056Babbi.mid O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini

057RowRo.mid Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional

058Smoky.mid On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional

059WeWis.mid We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional

060ImMai.mid Im Mai (DUET) Traditional

061Chris.mid O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional

062MaryH.mid Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional

063TenLi.mid Ten Little Indians (DUET) S. Winner

064PopGo.mid Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional

065Twink.mid Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional

066Close.mid Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau

067Cucko.mid The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional

068Augus.mid O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional

069Londo.mid London Bridge (DUET) Traditional

070Three.mid Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 137

Harmony Type List / Liste der Harmony-Typen / Liste des types d’har-

monie / Lista de tipos de armonías

No. Harmony Type Description

1 01(Standard Duet)

Harmony types 01–10, 13 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the

single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing

songs that contain chord data.

Die Harmony-Typen 01 bis 10, 13 sind Tonhöheneffekte und bereichern eine monophon im

rechten Tastaturbereich gespielte Melodie um ein-, zwei- oder dreistimmige Harmonien. Diese

Typen werden nur erzeugt, wenn Akkorde im Tastaturbereich für die Begleitung gespielt wer-

den.

Les types d’effets Harmony 01–10, 13 sont des effets basés sur la hauteur et ajoutent des har-

monies à une, deux ou trois notes à la mélodie à une seule note jouée de la main droite. Ces

effets ne sont audibles que lorsque des accords sont joués dans la section d’accompagnement

automatique du clavier.

Los tipos de armonía 01–10, 13 se basan en el tono y añaden armonías de una, dos o tres

notas a la melodía de una sola nota tocada en la parte de la mano derecha. Estos tipos sólo

suenan cuando se tocan acordes en la sección del acompañamiento automático del teclado.

2 02(Standard Trio)

3 03(Full Chord)

4 04(Rock Duet)

5 05(Country Duet)

6 06(Country Trio)

7 07(Block)

8 08(4-Way Close 1)

9 09(4-Way Close 2)

10 10(4-Way Open)

11 11(1+5)

12 12(Octave)

13 13(Strum)

14 14(Multi Assign)

15 15(Echo 1/4)

Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with

the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not;

however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 34). The individual

note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings

are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note

triplets.

• The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played.

• The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four).

• The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are

held.

Die Harmony-Typen 15 bis 26 sind Rhythmuseffekte und erzeugen im Takt zur Begleitautomatik

Verzierungen oder verzögerte Wiederholungen. Der jeweilige Harmony-Effekt wird sowohl bei

eingeschalteter als auch bei ausgeschalteter automatischer Bass/Akkord-Begleitung erzeugt;

die Effektgeschwindigkeit hängt jedoch stets von der aktuellen Tempoeinstellung ab (Seite 34).

Dank der speziﬁschen Notenwerte der einzelnen Harmony-Typen können Sie den Effekt präzise

mit dem Rhythmus synchronisieren. Es gibt auch Triolen-Einstellungen: 1/6 = Viertelnotentrio-

len, 1/12 = Achtelnotentriolen, 1/24 = Sechzehntelnotentriolen.

•Die Echo-Effekttypen (15 bis 18) erzeugen verzögerte Wiederholungen jeder gespielten Note.

•Mit den Tremolo-Effekttypen (19 bis 22) werden alle gehaltenen Noten (maximal vier Töne)

wiederholt.

•Die Triller-Effekttypen (23 bis 26) erzeugen Triller (zwei Töne in schnellem Wechsel), wenn

zwei Tasten gehalten werden.

Les types 15–26 sont des effets reposant sur le rythme qui ajoutent des embellissements ou

des répétitions retardées synchronisées avec l’accompagnement automatique. Ces types

d’effets sont audibles que l’accompagnement automatique soit activé ou non. Cependant, la

vitesse réelle de l’effet dépend du réglage du tempo (page 34). La valeur individuelle des notes

pour chaque type vous permet de synchroniser avec précision l’effet sur le rythme. Des régla-

ges de triolet sont également disponibles : 1/6 = triolets de noires, 1/12 = triolets de croches, 1/

24 = triolets de doubles croches.

• Les types d’effets Echo (15–18) créent des répétitions retardées de chaque note jouée.

• Les types d’effets Tremolo (19–22) répètent toutes les notes maintenues (jusqu’à quatre

notes).

• Les types d’effet Trill (23–26) créent des trilles à deux notes (notes alternées) lorsque deux

notes sont maintenues enfoncées.

Los tipos 15 a 26 son efectos basados en el ritmo y añaden embellecimientos o repeticiones

retardadas en sincronización con el acompañamiento automático. Estos tipos suenan tanto si

el acompañamiento automático está activado como si no; sin embargo, la velocidad real del

efecto depende del ajuste de tempo (página 34). Los valores de las notas individuales en cada

tipo le permiten sincronizar el efecto y el ritmo con una gran precisión. También hay disponibles

ajustes de tresillos: 1/6 = tresillos de notas negras, 1/12 = tresillos de corcheas, 1/24 = tresillos

de semicorcheas.

• Los tipos de efectos de eco (15 a 18) crean repeticiones retardadas de cada nota tocada.

• Los tipos de efectos de trémolo (19 a 22) repiten todas las notas que se mantienen pulsadas

(hasta cuatro).

• Los tipos de efectos de trino (23 a 26) crean trinos de dos notas (notas alternadas) cuando se

mantienen pulsadas dos teclas.

16 16(Echo 1/6)

17 17(Echo 1/8)

18 18(Echo 1/12)

19 19(Tremolo 1/8)

20 20(Tremolo 1/12)

21 21(Tremolo 1/16)

22 22(Tremolo 1/32)

23 23(Trill 1/12)

24 24(Trill 1/16)

25 25(Trill 1/24)

26 26(Trill 1/32)

Harmony Type List

138 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types

● Reverb Types / Reverb-Typen / Types d’effets Reverb / Tipos de reverberación

No. Type Description MSB LSB

1 HALL1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

2 HALL2 116

3 HALL3 117

4 HALL4 118

5 HALL5 11

6 HALL M 16

7 HALL L 17

8 BASIC HALL 130

9 LARGE HALL 131

10 ATMO HALL 123

11 ROOM1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.

216

12 ROOM2 217

13 ROOM3 218

14 ROOM4 219

15 ROOM5 20

16 ROOM6 21

17 ROOM7 22

18 ROOM S 25

19 ROOM M 26

20 ROOM L 27

21 ACOSTIC ROOM 220

22 DRUMS ROOM 221

23 PERC ROOM 222

24 STAGE1

Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.

316

25 STAGE2 317

26 STAGE3 30

27 STAGE4 31

28 PLATE1

Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.

416

29 PLATE2 417

30 PLATE3 40

31 GM PLATE 47

32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0

33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0

34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0

35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0

36 NO EFFECT No effect. 00

Effect Type List

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 139

● Chorus Types / Chorus-Typen / Types d’effets Chorus / Tipos de coro

No. Type Description MSB LSB

1 CHORUS1

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

66 17

2 CHORUS2 66 8

3 CHORUS3 66 16

4 CHORUS4 66 1

5 CHORUS5 65 2

6 CHORUS6 65 0

7 CHORUS7 65 1

8 CHORUS8 65 8

9 CHORUS FAST 65 16

10 CHORUS LITE 65 17

11 GM CHORUS1 65 3

12 GM CHORUS2 65 4

13 GM CHORUS3 65 5

14 GM CHORUS4 65 6

15 FB CHORUS 65 7

16 CELESTE1

A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

66 0

17 CELESTE2 66 2

18 SYMPHONIC1

Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.

68 16

19 SYMPHONIC2 68 0

20 FLANGER1

Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

67 8

21 FLANGER2 67 16

22 FLANGER3 67 17

23 FLANGER4 67 1

24 FLANGER5 67 0

25 GM FLANGER 67 7

26 ROTARY SP1

Simulates a rotary speaker.

69 16

27 ROTARY SP2 71 17

28 ROTARY SP3 71 18

29 ROTARY SP4 70 17

30 ROTARY SP5 66 18

31 ROTARY SP6 69 0

32 ROTARY SP7 71 22

33 2WAY ROT SP 86 0

34 AUTO PAN1

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

71 16

35 AUTO PAN2 71 0

36 EP AUTOPAN 71 21

37 T_AUTO PAN1 Tempo synchronized Auto PAN. 121 0

38 TREMOLO1

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

70 16

39 TREMOLO2 71 19

40 TREMOLO3 70 0

41 EP TREMOLO 70 18

42 GT TREMOLO1 71 20

43 GT TREMOLO2 70 19

44 T_TREMOLO 120 0

45 NO EFFECT No effect. 00

d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos

140 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

● DSP Types / DSP Typen / Types de DSP / Tipos de DSP

No. Type Description MSB LSB

1 HALL1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall.

2 HALL2 116

3 HALL3 117

4 HALL4 118

5 HALL5 11

6 HALL M 16

7 HALL L 17

8 BASIC HALL 130

9 LARGE HALL 131

10 ATMO HALL 123

11 ROOM1

Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room.

216

12 ROOM2 217

13 ROOM3 218

14 ROOM4 219

15 ROOM5 20

16 ROOM6 21

17 ROOM7 22

18 ROOM S 25

19 ROOM M 26

20 ROOM L 27

21 ACOSTIC ROOM 220

22 DRUMS ROOM 221

23 PERC ROOM 222

24 STAGE1

Reverb suitable for a solo instrument.

316

25 STAGE2 317

26 STAGE3 30

27 STAGE4 31

28 PLATE1

Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit.

416

29 PLATE2 417

30 PLATE3 40

31 GM PLATE 47

32 TUNNEL Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. 17 0

33 CANYON A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. 18 0

34 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. 19 0

35 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. 16 0

36 CHORUS1

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

66 17

37 CHORUS2 66 8

38 CHORUS3 66 16

39 CHORUS4 66 1

40 CHORUS5 65 2

41 CHORUS6 65 0

42 CHORUS7 65 1

43 CHORUS8 65 8

44 CHORUS FAST 65 16

45 CHORUS LITE 65 17

46 GM CHORUS1 65 3

47 GM CHORUS2 65 4

48 GM CHORUS3 65 5

49 GM CHORUS4 65 6

50 FB CHORUS 65 7

51 CELESTE1

A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.

66 0

52 CELESTE2 66 2

53 SYMPHONIC1

Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste.

68 16

54 SYMPHONIC2 68 0

55 ENS DETUNE1

Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound.

87 0

56 ENS DETUNE2 87 16

57 KARAOKE1

Echo for karaoke.

20 0

58 KARAOKE2 20 1

59 KARAOKE3 20 2

60 ER1

This effect isolates only the early reﬂection components of the reverb.

61 ER2 91

62 GATE REVERB Simulation of gated reverb. 10 0

63 REVERS GATE Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse. 11 0

64 EQ DISCO

Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco

music.

76 16

65 EQ TEL

Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard

through a telephone receiver.

76 17

66 2BAND EQ Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies. 77 0

Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 141

67 3BAND EQ

Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequen-

cies.

76 0

68 ST 3BAND EQ

Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range fre-

quencies.

76 18

69 HM ENHANCE1

Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out.

81 16

70 HM ENHANCE2 81 0

71 FLANGER1

Adds a sweeping effect to the sound.

67 8

72 FLANGER2 67 16

73 FLANGER3 67 17

74 FLANGER4 67 1

75 FLANGER5 67 0

76 GM FLANGER 67 7

77 V_FLANGER Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds. 104 0

78 TEMPO FLANGER Tempo synchronized ﬂanger. 107 0

79 DELAY LCR1

Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center).

516

80 DELAY LCR2 50

81 DELAY LR Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. 6 0

82 ECHO Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R. 7 0

83 CROSS DELAY The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. 8 0

84 TEMPO DELAY Tempo synchronized delay. 21 0

85 TEMPO ECHO Tempo synchronized delay. 21 8

86 TEMPO CROSS Tempo synchronized L&R delay. 22 0

87 V_DST ROCA

Vintage Distortion.

103 18

88 V_DST FUSION 103 19

89 V_DST CRUNC 98 28

90 V_DST VINTAG 98 29

91 V_DST HARD2 98 30

92 V_DST HEAVY 98 31

93 V_DST HARD1 98 0

94 V_DST SOFT 98 2

95 DIST HARD1

Hard-edge distortion.

75 16

96 DIST HARD2 75 22

97 DIST SOFT1

Soft, warm distortion.

75 17

98 DIST SOFT2 75 23

99 DIST HEAVY Heavy distortion. 73 0

100 OVERDRIVE1

Adds mild distortion to the sound.

74 0

101 OVERDRIVE2 74 9

102 ST DIST Stereo distortion. 73 8

103 ST OD Stereo Overdrive. 74 8

104 ST DIST HARD Hard-edge stereo distortion. 75 18

105 ST DIST SOFT Soft, warm soft distortion. 75 19

106 AMP SIM1

A simulation of a guitar amp.

75 0

107 AMP SIM2 75 1

108 ST AMP1

Stereo amp simulator.

75 20

109 ST AMP2 75 21

110 ST AMP3 75 8

111 ST AMP4 75 24

112 ST AMP5 75 25

113 ST AMP6 75 26

114 DST+DELAY1

Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

95 16

115 DST+DELAY2 95 0

116 OD+DELAY1

Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.

95 17

117 OD+DELAY2 95 1

118 CMP+DST+DLY1

Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

96 16

119 CMP+DST+DLY2 96 0

120 CMP+OD+DLY1

Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.

96 17

121 CMP+OD+DLY2 96 1

122 V_DST H+DLY

V Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

98 1

123 V_DST S+DLY 98 3

124 DST+TDLY Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 100 0

125 OD+TDLY Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 100 1

126 COMP+DIST1

Compressor and Distotion are connected in series.

73 16

127 COMP+DIST2 73 1

128 CMP+DST+TDLY Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 101 0

129 CMP+OD+TDLY1

Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

101 1

130 CMP+OD+TDLY2 101 16

131 CMP+OD+TDLY3 101 17

132 CMP+OD+TDLY4 101 18

133 CMP+OD+TDLY5 101 19

134 CMP+OD+TDLY6 101 20

No. Type Description MSB LSB

Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos

142

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

135 V_DST H+TDL1

V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

103 0

136 V_DST H+TDL2 103 17

137 V_DST S+TDL1 103 1

138 V_DST S+TDL2 103 16

139 COMP MED

Holds down the output level when a speciﬁed input level is exceeded. A sense of attack

can also be added to the sound.

83 16

140 COMP HEAVY 83 17

141 COMP MELODY 105 16

142 COMP BASS 105 17

143 MBAND COMP This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound. 105 0

144 COMPRESSOR

Holds down the output level when a speciﬁed input level is exceeded. A sense of attack

can also be added to the sound.

83 0

145 NOISE GATE Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a speciﬁed level. 84 0

146 VCE CANCEL Attenuates the audio in the center position. 85 0

147 AMBIENCE Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. 88 0

148 TALKING MOD Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. 93 0

149 ISOLATOR Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies. 115 0

150 PHASER1

Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound.

72 0

151 PHASER2 72 8

152 PHASER3 72 19

153 T_PHASER1 108 0

154 T_PHASER2 108 16

155 EP PHASER1 72 17

156 EP PHASER2 72 18

157 EP PHASER3 72 16

158 PITCH CHG1

Changes the pitch of the input signal.

80 16

159 PITCH CHG2 80 0

160 PITCH CHG3 80 1

161 DUAL ROT BRT

Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching.

99 16

162 D ROT BRT F 99 30

163 DUAL ROT WRM 99 17

164 D ROT WRM F 99 31

165 DUAL ROT SP1 99 0

166 DUAL ROT SP2 99 1

167 ROTARY SP1

Simulates a rotary speaker.

69 16

168 ROTARY SP2 71 17

169 ROT SP2 FAST 71 23

170 ROTARY SP3 71 18

171 ROT SP3 FAST 71 24

172 ROTARY SP4 70 17

173 ROT SP4 FAST 70 20

174 ROTARY SP5 66 18

175 ROT SP5 FAST 66 19

176 ROTARY SP6 69 0

177 ROTARY SP7 71 22

178 ROT SP7 FAST 71 25

179 ROTARY SP8 69 17

180 ROT SP8 FAST 69 18

181 ROTARY SP9 69 19

182 ROT SP9 FAST 69 20

183 2WAY ROT SP 86 0

184 DST+ROT SP Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 1

185 DST+2ROT SP Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 1

186 OD+ROT SP Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 2

187 OD+2ROT SP Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 2

188 AMP+ROT SP Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. 69 3

189 AMP+2ROT SP Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. 86 3

190 AUTO PAN1

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back).

71 16

191 AUTO PAN2 71 0

192 AUTO PAN3 71 1

193 EP AUTOPAN 71 21

194 T_AUTO PAN1

Tempo synchronized pan.

121 0

195 T_AUTO PAN2 121 1

196 TREMOLO1

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

70 16

197 TREMOLO2 71 19

198 TREMOLO3 70 0

199 EP TREMOLO 70 18

200 GT TREMOLO1 71 20

201 GT TREMOLO2 70 19

202 VIBE VIBRATE Vibraphone effect. 119 0

203 T_TREMOLO Tempo synchronized tremolo. 120 0

No. Type Description MSB LSB

Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 143

• Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following:

Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 93

(For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1).

• The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice.

204 AUTO WAH1

Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah ﬁlter.

78 16

205 AUTO WAH2 78 0

206 AT WAH+DST1

The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion.

78 17

207 AT WAH+DST2 78 1

208 AT WAH+OD1

The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.

78 18

209 AT WAH+OD2 78 2

210 TEMPO AT WAH Tempo synchronized auto wah. 79 0

211 TOUCH WAH1

Changes the center frequency of a wah ﬁlter according to the input level.

82 0

212 TOUCH WAH2 82 8

213 TOUCH WAH3 82 20

214 TC WAH+DST1

The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion.

82 16

215 TC WAH+DST2 82 1

216 TC WAH+OD1

The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive.

82 17

217 TC WAH+OD2 82 2

218 WH+DST+DLY1

Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series.

97 16

219 WH+DST+DLY2 97 0

220 WH+DST+TDLY WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. 102 0

221 WH+OD+DLY1

Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series.

97 17

222 WH+OD+DLY2 97 1

223 WH+OD+TDLY1

WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series.

102 1

224 WH+OD+TDLY2 102 16

225 CLVI TC WAH1

Clavinet Touch Wah.

82 18

226 CLVI TC WAH2 82 28

227 EP TC WAH1

EP Touch Wah.

82 19

228 EP TC WAH2 82 29

229 PEDAL WAH Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah ﬁlter. 122 0

230 PEDAL WH+DST

Distortion applied to the pedal wah output.

122 1

231 P.WH+DIST HD 122 21

232 P.WH+DIST HV 122 23

233 P.WH+DIST LT 122 25

234 PEDAL WH+OD

Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output.

122 2

235 P.WH+OD HD 122 22

236 P.WH+OD HV 122 24

237 P.WH+OD LT 122 26

238 NO EFFECT No effect. 00

239 THRU Bypass without applying an effect. 64 0

No. Type Description MSB LSB

Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos

144 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Speciﬁcations / Technische Daten /

Spéciﬁcations techniques / Especiﬁcaciones

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify prod-

ucts or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check

with your Yamaha dealer.

*Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor,

Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das

Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung.

* Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de

changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les

équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.

* Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva

el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las espe-

cificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha.

Dimensions

[W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 852mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 33-9/16")

With music rest [W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 1,006mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 39-5/8")

Weight 49kg (108 lbs.)

Keyboard

Type GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard with matte black keytops

Number of keys 88

Touch Sensitivity Soft/Medium/Hard/Off

Pedal Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft

Display

Size and Type 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)

Score, Lyrics Yes

Contrast Yes

Cabinet

Key Cover Style Sliding

Music rest Yes

Voices

Tone Generation Technology AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Number of Dynamic Steps 3

Number of Polyphony (Max.) 64

Number of Voices 131panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices

Effects

Reverb 35 types

Chorus 44 types

Harmony 26 types

DSP 238 types

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Styles

Number of Styles 160 Preset styles + External ﬁles

Fingering Multi ﬁngering/Full keyboard

One Touch Setting Yes

Songs

Number of Songs 30 Preset songs + 5 User songs + 70 External songs (CD-ROM)

Recording 5 User Songs

Easy Song Arranger Yes

Lesson Yes

Music Data Base Number of MDB 300 Preset MDB + External ﬁles

Storage USB device Yes

Tempo

Range 5–280

Metronome Yes

Registration Memory 8 Banks x 2

Other Functions

Piano Reset Yes

Performance Assistant Technology Yes

Transpose, Tuning Yes

Connectivity

Headphones 2

USB TO HOST Yes

USB TO DEVICE Yes

Ampliﬁers/Speakers

Ampliﬁers 20W + 20W

Speakers 12cm x 2

Accessories Included Accessories

Accessories CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, My Yamaha Product

User Registration, Bench (included or optional depending on locale),

Owner’s Manual

Optional Accessories

Headphones HPE-150

Floppy Disk Drive UD-FD01

Speciﬁcations

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 145

146 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 147

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that

used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household

waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to

applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the

Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and

prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which

could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact

your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you

purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer

or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items,

please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of

disposal.

Verbraucherinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung alter Elektrogeräte

Beﬁndet sich dieses Symbol auf den Produkten, der Verpackung und/oder

beiliegenden Unterlagen, so sollten benutzte elektrische Geräte nicht mit dem

normalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden.

In Übereinstimmung mit Ihren nationalen Bestimmungen und den Richtlinien 2002/96/

EC, bringen Sie alte Geräte bitte zur fachgerechten Entsorgung, Wiederaufbereitung

und Wiederverwendung zu den entsprechenden Sammelstellen.

Durch die fachgerechte Entsorgung der Elektrogeräte helfen Sie, wertvolle

Ressourcen zu schützen und verhindern mögliche negative Auswirkungen auf die

menschliche Gesundheit und die Umwelt, die andernfalls durch unsachgerechte

Müllentsorgung auftreten könnten.

Für weitere Informationen zum Sammeln und Wiederaufbereiten alter Elektrogeräte,

kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtliche Stadt- oder Gemeindeverwaltung, Ihren

Abfallentsorgungsdienst oder die Verkaufsstelle der Artikel.

[Information für geschäftliche Anwender in der Europäischen Union]

Wenn Sie Elektrogeräte ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Händler

oder Zulieferer für weitere Informationen.

[Entsorgungsinformation für Länder außerhalb der Europäischen Union]

Dieses Symbol gilt nur innerhalb der Europäischen Union. Wenn Sie solche Artikel

ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtlichen Behörden oder Ihren

Händler und fragen Sie nach der sachgerechten Entsorgungsmethode.

148 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones

Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements

électriques et électroniques.

Le symbole sur les produits, l’emballage et/ou les documents joints signiﬁe que les

produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les

déchets domestiques habituels.

Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets

d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de

collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux

Directives 2002/96/EC.

En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et

électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la

prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir

lors d’un traitement inapproprié des déchets.

Pour plus d’informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets

d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité,

votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les

produits.

[Pour les professionnels dans l’Union Européenne]

Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et

électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d’informations.

[Information sur le traitement dans d’autres pays en dehors de l’Union

Européenne]

Ce symbole est seulement valables dans l’Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous

débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez

contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de

traitement appropriée.

Información para Usuarios sobre Recolección y Disposición de Equipamiento Viejo

Este símbolo en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentación que se acompañe

signiﬁca que los productos electrónicos y eléctricos usados no deben ser mezclados

con desechos hogareños corrientes.

Para el tratamiento, recuperación y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos, por

favor llévelos a puntos de recolección aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislación nacional

y las directivas 2002/96/EC.

Al disponer de estos productos correctamente, ayudará a ahorrar recursos valiosos y

a prevenir cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio

ambiente, el cual podría surgir de un inapropiado manejo de los desechos.

Para mayor información sobre recolección y reciclado de productos viejos, por favor

contacte a su municipio local, su servicio de gestión de residuos o el punto de venta

en el cual usted adquirió los artículos.

[Para usuarios de negocios en la Unión Europea]

Si usted desea deshacerse de equipamiento eléctrico y electrónico, por favor contacte

a su vendedor o proveedor para mayor información.

[Información sobre la Disposición en otros países fuera de la Unión Europea]

Este símbolo sólo es válidos en la Unión Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos

artículos, por favor contacte a sus autoridades locales y pregunte por el método

correcto de disposición.

Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 149

The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to

constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table speciﬁed

by the manufacturer, or sold with

the apparatus. When a cart is

used, use caution when moving

the cart/apparatus combination

to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug

is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have

fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,

or has been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16

ﬂoor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

EKB54

U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

WR86780 103POCR*.*-**B0

Printed in Indonesia

Yamaha Global Home

http://www.yamaha.com

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d’emploi Manual de instrucciones For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions at the end of this manual. IMPORTANT — Check your power supply — Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. Weitere Informationen über die Montage des Keyboard-Ständers erhalten Sie in den Anweisungen am Ende dieses Handbuchs. WICHTIG — Überprüfen Sie Ihren Netzanschluss — Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Spannung in Ihrem örtlichen Stromnetz mit der Spannung übereinstimmt, die auf dem Typenschild auf der Unterseite des Instruments angegeben ist. In bestimmten Regionen ist auf der Unterseite des Keyboards in der Nähe des Netzkabels ein Spannungswähler angebracht. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Spannungswähler auf die Spannung Ihres lokalen Stromnetzes eingestellt ist. Dieser Spannungswähler ist bei Auslieferung auf 240 V eingestellt. Sie können die Einstellung mit einem Schlitzschraubenzieher ändern. Drehen Sie dazu den Wählschalter, bis der Pfeil auf dem Instrument auf die richtige Spannung zeigt. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'assemblage du support du clavier, reportez-vous aux instructions à la fin de ce manuel. IMPORTANT — Contrôler la source d'alimentation — Vérifiez que la tension spécifiée sur le panneau inférieur correspond à la tension du secteur. Dans certaines régions, l'instrument peut être équipé d'un sélecteur de tension situé sur le panneau inférieur du clavier à proximité du cordon d'alimentation. Vérifiez que ce sélecteur est bien réglé en fonction de la tension secteur de votre région. Le sélecteur de tension est réglé sur 240 V au départ d'usine. Pour modifier ce réglage, utilisez un tournevis à lame plate pour tourner le sélecteur afin de mettre l'indication correspondant à la tension de votre région vis à vis du repère triangulaire situé sur le panneau. Para información sobre el montaje del soporte del teclado, consulte las instrucciones al final de este manual. IMPORTANTE — Verifique la alimentación de corriente — Asegúrese de que tensión de alimentación de CA de su area corresponde con la tension especificada en la placa de características del panel inferior. En algunas zonas puede haberse incorporado un selector de tensión en el panel inferior de la unidad del teclado principal, cerca del cable de alimentación. Asegúrese de que el selector de tensión esté ajustado a la tensión de su área. El selector de tension se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fábrica. Para cambiar el ajuste, emplee un destornillador de cabeza ”recta” para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensión correcta al lado del indicador del panel. EN DE FR ES Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings. The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Model Serial No. 92-469- ➀ 2 Owner’s Manual Purchase Date FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. (class B) Die Seriennummer dieses Produkts befindet sich an der Unterseite des Geräts. Sie sollten die Nummer des Modells, die Seriennummer und das Kaufdatum an den unten vorgesehenen Stellen eintragen und diese Anleitung als Dokument Ihres Kaufs aufbewahren. Modellnr. Seriennr. Vous pouvez trouver le numéro de série de ce produit sur le bas de l'unité. Notez ce numéro de série dans l'espace fourni ci-dessous et conservez ce manuel en tant que preuve permanente de votre achat afin de faciliter l'identification du produit en cas de vol. (2 wires) N˚ de modèle N˚ de série COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Piano Model Name : YDP-V240 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. El número de serie de este producto se encuentra en la parte inferior de la unidad. Debe tomar nota del número de serie en el espacio proporcionado a continuación y conservar este manual como registro permanente de su adquisición; todo ello facilitará la identificación en caso de robo. Modelo nº Serie nº (bottom) (FCC DoC) Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Assembly • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. (1)B-13 4 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. • During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Using the bench (If included) • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or stepladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data Handling caution • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the key cover or instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the key cover, panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 90.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer (pages 98, 99, 109). • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Backing up the USB storage device/external media • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (1)B-13 2/2 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Mona Lisa from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A. Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright © 1961 ; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP) Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). 6 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Digital Piano! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List The documentation and reference materials for this instrument consist of the following: Owner’s Manual (this book) ■ Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. ■ Reference (page 70): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the instrument’s various functions. ■ Appendix (page 110): This section introduces reference material. Data List You can download various MIDI-related reference materials, such as the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart, from the Yamaha Manual Library. Connect to the Internet, visit the following website, type the model name of your instrument (such as “YDP-V240”) in the Model Name text box, then click the Search button. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Accessories The package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • Accessory CD-ROM • Accessory CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide • Owner’s manual (this book) • Bench * A bench may be included or optional, depending on your locale. • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard with matte black keytops Graded Hammer Standard keyboard with matte black keytops on the instrument, feature graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. They respond to a heavier touch in the low range of the keyboard and a lighter touch in the higher range of the keyboard, thus providing natural grandpiano type playability. The matte finish of the black keys enhances keyboard’s luxurious appearance. The Graded Hammer keyboard also offers superb playability for tremolo and other repetitive-striking techniques. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 39 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply by tapping one key. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices All you need is one finger! Page 17 The instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 27 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. ■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. * No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data. 8 Owner’s Manual Page 37 Contents Introduction Backup and Initialization Copyright Notice ....................................................................... 6 Logos........................................................................................ 6 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List ................................ 7 Accessories .............................................................................. 7 Special Features ...................................................................... 8 Setting Up 10 Key Cover............................................................................... 10 Music Rest.............................................................................. 10 Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal) ............ 11 Turning the Power On ............................................................ 11 Using Headphones ................................................................. 12 Maintenance ........................................................................... 13 Panel Controls and Terminals 14 Front Panel ............................................................................. 15 Pedals, Jacks and Terminals ................................................. 15 Quick Guide Changing the Display Language 16 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN ............................................. 17 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19 Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20 Using the Pedals .................................................................... 21 Fun Sounds 22 Drum Kits................................................................................ 22 Sound Effects ......................................................................... 22 The Metronome 23 Start the Metronome............................................................... 23 Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 23 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 24 Setting the Click bell sound .................................................... 25 Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 25 Playing Styles 26 Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 26 Play Along with a Style ........................................................... 27 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 31 Using Songs 32 Play the Demo song ............................................................... 32 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 33 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 34 Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 34 Song List ................................................................................ 35 Types of Songs ...................................................................... 36 Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 37 Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 38 The Easy Way to Play Piano 39 CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 40 CHORD/FREE Type— Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 42 MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 44 CHORD/MELODY— Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 46 Select a Song For a Lesson 50 Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 51 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 54 Lesson 3—Minus One ............................................................ 55 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 56 Play Using the Music Database Change a Song’s Style 57 58 Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 58 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................... 58 Record Your Own Performance 60 Recording Procedure ............................................................. 61 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ......................................... 63 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 64 65 Backup.................................................................................... 65 Initialization ............................................................................. 65 Basic Operation 66 Basic Operation ...................................................................... 66 The Displays ........................................................................... 68 MAIN Display Items ................................................................ 69 Reference Play with a Variety of Effects 70 Adding Harmony ..................................................................... 70 Adding Reverb ........................................................................ 71 Adding Chorus ........................................................................ 72 Adding DSP ............................................................................ 73 Adding Sustain ....................................................................... 74 Handy Performance Features 75 Tap Start ................................................................................. 75 Touch Response Sensitivity ................................................... 75 One Touch Setting.................................................................. 76 Select a Sound Type .............................................................. 77 Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 78 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 79 Pattern Variation (Sections).................................................... 79 Setting the Split Point ............................................................. 82 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 83 Adjusting the Style Volume..................................................... 83 Chord Basics .......................................................................... 84 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard .............................. 86 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ..................... 87 Song Settings 88 Song Volume .......................................................................... 88 A-B Repeat ............................................................................. 88 Muting Independent Song Parts ............................................. 89 Change the Melody Voice ...................................................... 89 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 90 Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................ 90 Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 91 The Functions 92 Selecting and Setting Functions ............................................. 92 Saving and Loading Data 95 Connecting a USB Flash Memory .......................................... 95 Formatting USB Flash Memory .............................................. 97 Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory ...... 98 Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory .............................. 99 Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory ............................. 100 Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory ............................ 101 Delete User Data from the Instrument .................................. 102 Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory ................... 102 Connections 103 Connectors ........................................................................... 103 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 104 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ..... 105 Remote Control of MIDI Devices .......................................... 106 Initial Send ............................................................................ 107 Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ... 107 Appendix Troubleshooting .................................................................... 110 Messages ............................................................................. 112 Keyboard Stand Assembly............................... 114 Index ..................................................................................... 118 Scores .................................................................................. 120 Voice List .............................................................................. 126 Drum Kit List ......................................................................... 132 Style List ............................................................................... 134 Music Database List ............................................................. 135 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM.......................... 136 Harmony Type List ............................................................... 137 Effect Type List ..................................................................... 138 Specifications ....................................................................... 144 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Key Cover ■ To open the key cover: CAUTION Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. • Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s) between the cover and main unit. ■ To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. CAUTION • Do not place objects, such as a piece of metal or paper, on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. CAUTION • Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. Music Rest ■ To raise the music rest: 1 2 3 Pull the music rest up and toward yourself as far as it will go. Flip down the two metal supports at the left and right on the rear of the music rest. Lower the music rest so that it rests on the metal supports. ■ To lower the music rest: 1 2 3 Pull the music rest toward yourself as far as it will go. Raise the two metal supports (at the rear of the music rest). Gently lower the music rest backward until it is all the way down. CAUTION • Do not try to use the music rest in a half-raised position. When lowering the music rest, do not release your hands from the music rest until it is all the way down. 10 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal) Computer Connect the instrument’s USB TO HOST terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 104). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: USB TO HOST terminal USB TO HOST • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn the instrument’s power on. • Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. USB cable Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”. Turning the Power On Power switch Power indicator 1 2 3 Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left. Check the power cord to make sure it is connected properly. (See page 116.) Press the power switch to turn on the power. Press the power switch again to turn the power OFF. NOTE Power indicator • If you forget to turn off the power to the instrument and close the key cover, the power indicator will remain lit, indicating that the power is still on. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “off” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power cord from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Using Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. You can connect two sets of standard stereo headphones. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either jack.) PHONES Bottom surface Standard stereo phone plug Using the Headphone Hanger A headphone hanger is included in the package so that you can hang the headphoneson this instrument. Install the headphone hanger using the included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. CAUTION • Do not hang anything other than the headphones on the hanger. Otherwise, this instrument or the hanger may be damaged. 12 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Maintenance To keep your instrument in optimum condition, we recommend that you periodically follow the maintenance points below. ■ Instrument and Bench Maintenance ■ Tuning When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Unlike an acoustic piano, the instrument does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. CAUTION • Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemicalimpregnated wiping cloths. Tighten the screws of the instrument and bench periodically. ■ Pedal Cleaning As with an acoustic piano, pedals may become tarnished across the ages. When this occurs, polish the pedal with a compound designed for piano pedals. Before using the compound, make sure to read the instructions for proper usage. ■ Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the instrument along with other belongings. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition it was in when you first took it out of the box. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it up against a wall or stand it up on its side. Do not subject the instrument to excessive vibration or shock. When transporting the assembled instrument, make sure all screws are properly tightened and have not been loosened by moving the instrument. CAUTION • Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemicalimpregnated wiping cloths. Otherwise, the pedal may become discolored or degraded. Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel w e t r o y u i !2 !1 !0 !3 #9 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 PHONES q #6 #8 PEDAL #7 USB $0 TO HOST 14 Owner’s Manual q Voice Category List (page 126) Style Category List (page 134) Song Category List (page 35) Music Database List (page 135) !9 Panel Controls and Terminals ¸ Display (pages 68, 69) @0 @1 @8 @2 @3 @4 @5 @9 #0 #1 #2 @6 #3 #4 @7 #5 Front Panel i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 [FUNCTION] button .........................pages 68, 92 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button .............page 23 [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................pages 34, 75 LESSON [L], [R], [START] buttons.........page 51 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons ......................page 61 [REPEAT & LEARN]/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................pages 56, 27 [A-B REPEAT]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............pages 88, 79 [REW]/[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ...pages 34, 79 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ...............pages 34, 81 [PAUSE]/[SYNC START] button......pages 34, 80 !8 [START/STOP] button ...............pages 26, 33, 67 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 [CONTRAST] knob ................................. page 69 [EXIT] button........................................... page 68 [SONG] button ........................................ page 33 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button ....... page 58 [STYLE] button ....................................... page 26 [VOICE] button........................................ page 17 Dial....................................................pages 67, 92 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons .............................................pages 67, 92 @8 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons............................pages 67, 92 r Power switch ( ) ...................................page 11 [MASTER VOLUME] control ...........pages 11, 66 [DEMO] button.........................................page 32 FILE CONTROL [MENU], [EXECUTE] buttons.......................pages 95–101 t [LYRICS] button.......................................page 38 y [SCORE] button.......................................page 37 u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button............................page 40 f q w e r @9 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button .......................... page 19 [DUAL ON/OFF] button .......................... page 18 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ................. page 70 [DSP ON/OFF] button............................. page 73 [PIANO RESET] button .......................... page 20 REGIST MEMORY [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons......... page 90 #5 Drum Kit .................................................. page 22 The illustrations above each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. !9 [MUSIC DATABASE] button....................page 57 Pedals, Jacks and Terminals #6 Pedals.......................................................page 21 #7 [PEDAL] jack..........................................page 116 #8 [PHONES] jacks.......................................page 12 #9 USB TO DEVICE terminal....................... page 96 $0 USB TO HOST terminal ........................ page 104 Owner’s Manual 15 Changing the Display Language Quick Guide This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be displayed in Japanese where appropriate. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of times until the “Language” item appears. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 The currently selected display language will appear below the “Language” item. When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the language as required. Language item The currently selected language 3 Select a display language. The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese. The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so that it is retained even when the power is turned off. 4 16 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The main voice selection display will appear. The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected voice number and name 2 Select the voice you want to play. While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “106 Flute” voice. Select 106 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. Adjusts volume. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The dual voice selection display will appear. Dual voice selection display The currently selected dual voice Hold for longer than a second 3 18 Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “124 Vibraphone” voice. Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 82). Split point (default value is 054) 021 (A-1) 024 (C0) 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) Split voice 1 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) 108 (C7) Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The split voice selection display will appear. Split voice selection display The currently selected split voice Hold for longer than a second Owner’s Manual 19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. 4 Play the keyboard. Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “042 Folk Guitar” voice. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PIANO RESET] button. The “001 Natural! Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PIANO RESET] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. 20 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Using the Pedals The instrument has three foot pedals that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. NOTE • The pedal functions do not affect Split voice. NOTE Damper (Right) Pedal The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed, notes sustain longer. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. The damper pedal also features a naturally expressive half-pedal function. • If the damper pedal doesn’t work, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the jack (page 116). NOTE Half-pedal: • While playing the piano with Sustain and you want to slightly mute the sustained sound, release the damper pedal from maximum position to half position. When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (Center) Pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” NOTE • Organ, string and choir voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed. When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note, the note will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft (Left) Pedal The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Owner’s Manual 21 Fun Sounds This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Drum Kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. ◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “132 Standard Kit 1”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. For details on the instruments included in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 132 to 143), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 132. Sound Effects The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 142 and 143). When either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard. ◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “143 SFX Kit 2”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many other useful effects. “142 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning, running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound. For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum Kit List” on page 133. 22 Owner’s Manual The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Start the Metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 4/4 Current setting Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo 2 Use the dial to select a tempo from 5 to 280. Owner’s Manual 23 The Metronome Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Time Signature–Numerator”. Hold for longer than a second Numerator (Number of beats per measure.) Denominator (The length of one beat.) The available range is from 1 through 60. Select 5 for this example. A bell accent will be sounded at the first beat of each measure. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Signature–Denominator”. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. 24 r NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. f 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. Owner’s Manual The Metronome Setting the Click bell sound This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Bell item. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn the bell sound on or off. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 Adjusting the Metronome Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 Metronome volume 3 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 134 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number and name will be highlighted. NOTE • When you play the style, set the Sound Type to “Style.” Doing this a more natural, enhanced sound over the internal speakers (see page 77). However, when using the headphones, normal sound is applied. The currently selected style 2 Select a style. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 26 Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 134. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. Owner’s Manual NOTE • Style files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Styles (Style numbers 161–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 107. NOTE • Style numbers 131, 143–160 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 27, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (054: F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 82. Split point (054: F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. Flashes when sync start is on. Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Styles When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 29. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 79. 28 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 27 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 27. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 041 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Styles Recommended Style 148 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 096 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. 30 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 27). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 054/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 054/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 C sus4 Cm Cm (b5) ) C ( C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) C aug ) ( (9) (11) C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (13) ( ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) (#9) C7 ) C 7sus4 (b5) C7 C7 ) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 ) • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) ( C m7 ) C M7 • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. C M7 ( ( (b5) C7 (#11) (9) ) • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. ( Cm ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. C sus2 * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. Owner’s Manual 31 Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to a demo song and 29 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to play a demo song and select other songs, and briefly describe the demo song and 29 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Play the Demo song 1 Press the [DEMO] button The demo song will start playing. To stop demo play back at any time, press the [DEMO] button or [START/STOP] button. or 32 Owner’s Manual Record Using Songs Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button The song selection display will appear. The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name 2 NOTE Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 35. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. • You can also play songs you have recorded yourself (User Songs) or songs that have been transferred to the instrument from a computer in the same way that you play the internal songs. The song highlighted here can be played 3 001–030 Built in Songs (See page 35) 031–035 User Songs (Songs you record yourself). 036– Songs transferred from a computer (pages 107–109) or Songs in a USB flash memory connected to the instrument (page 95) Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! Owner’s Manual 33 Using Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Change the Song Tempo You can change the song tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 5 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 34 Owner’s Manual Using Songs Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category No. 1 Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD Name This song showcases the beautiful piano sound. The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the various features. 2 CHORD Winter Serenade 3 CHORD Take off 4 CHORD Live! Grand Demo 5 CHORD Live! Orchestra Demo 6 CHORD Cool! RotorOrgan Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD ModernHarp & Sweet Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 17 Suggested Uses Mozart Piano Sonata No.13, K333 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. The lesson function cannot be used with songs 10 and 11. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. Owner’s Manual 35 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by this instrument. ● Demo Song and Preset songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ........................................ Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 108 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files from storage to playback. Computer Your own performance USB flash memory Song Song Record Transfer (page 60) (page 107) Connect (page 103) Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) The 30 songs built into the instrument. User Songs (031–035) External Songs (loaded Song) (036–) Song Song Save Play NOTE • User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing score display and can be used with the lesson features. NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the flash memory area for the external song, and vice versa. 36 Owner’s Manual USB (036–) Song Load Using Songs Displaying the Song Score This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs. Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs in SMF format stored in a USB fl ash memory or the instrument’s internal flash memory. 1 2 Select a song. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 33. Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will appear. There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff. These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed. NOTE • The score is created from the recorded song data, and it may not be exactly the same as original score. • Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-staff score display of a song that includes chord and lyric data. • When there are many lyrics they may be displayed in two rows a measure. • Some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated if the selected song has a lot of lyrics. Single-staff Marker Melody score • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the quantize function (page 94). Chord Lyrics NOTE Double-staff 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. • No chords or lyrics are shown on the double-staff. The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of the score to indicate the current location. Owner’s Manual 37 Using Songs Display the Lyrics If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display. No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed. 1 Select a song. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button. Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2 described on page 33. The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display. NOTE • Songs downloaded from the Internet or commercially available song files, including XF format files (page 6), are compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. NOTE • If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing the display language (page 16). Song title, lyricist, and composer. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song. Lyrics and chord display ■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display Number 38 Name 016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 020 Against All Odds (Collins 0007403) 030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results for you. ● Chord ...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything with both your left and right hands. ● Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with lefthand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with your right hand. Split point Play your own melody with the right hand. ● Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve never played a keyboard instrument before! ● Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the keyboard using the Chord type. Split point Refer to page 48 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. Owner’s Manual 39 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD type. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”. When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song can be seen in the display! NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. ● What is a Song? You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term “Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should always be used with a song (page 32). 40 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin playing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be shown in the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Before After Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. This is the performance assistant technology Chord type. NOTE • The score for Ave Maria is provided on page 122. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 41 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD/FREE type. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Free Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Free type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Nocturne”. NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. 42 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an FA-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type. NOTE • The score for Nocturne is provided on page 124. Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand part in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 43 The Easy Way to Play Piano MELODY Type—Play with One Finger See page 48 for some hints on how to play melodies. 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the MELODY type. Select Melody Hold for longer than a second Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. 44 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5). Song start! 5 Play on the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one finger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. Sounds like a melody! How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type! You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 45 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The currently selected type is shown in the MAIN display when the performance assistant technology feature is on. The currently selected type 2 Select the CHORD/MELODY type. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Melody Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 32) The song displayed here will be played. 46 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth measure. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand. You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your left hand. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. “...” will appear on the display where the performance assistant technology type is normally shown. Owner’s Manual 47 The Easy Way to Play Piano Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! Here are a few hints for using the Chord type. If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the lefthand section of the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). The chord information included in the song is displayed in the lower area of the MAIN display. You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. 48 Owner’s Manual ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. The Easy Way to Play Piano Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type. If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen score feature. Displaying the Score. After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 44, press the [SCORE] button. The melody score will appear. Appears when the performance assistant technology is on Marker Chord Melody The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback. If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm. Play while watching the marker ● Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology. When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any combination type that includes the Melody type. ● External Songs and the performance assistant technology. Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as they include the required chord and/or melody data. See page 108 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. Owner’s Manual 49 Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0/1) transferred to the instrument from a computer. (page 107) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Lesson start! The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. NOTE • Song numbers 10 and 11 are function demos for performance assistant. The lesson function cannot be used with them. 50 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. 2 Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 35 there are a variety of song types. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Select R for right-hand lesson. Select L for left-hand lesson. Select LR for bothhands lesson. Owner’s Manual 51 Select a Song For a Lesson 4 Start Lesson 1. Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... An explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few seconds before the lesson begins. In this case the “R1” indicates that righthand lesson 1 has been selected. (Lesson 1) (Lesson 2) (Lesson 3) (Song Lesson off) Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played is indicated by a dot (●) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the correct note. The triangular marker (▼) above the score indicates playback progress. ▼ Marker Left-hand part ● Marker 52 Owner’s Manual Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) Select a Song For a Lesson ● Shifting the keyboard left or right. The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing the [+] or [-] button. The displayed range (61 keys) Actual keyboard range is 88 keys 61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. This instrument actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or right so you can see the notes (the ● marker will appear on the appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson. 5 Stop the Lesson mode You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 94). Owner’s Manual 53 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 51). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R2” indicates that right-hand lesson 2 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Play while following the score marker Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 54 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 51). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R3” indicates that right-hand lesson 3 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. ▼ Marker Left-hand part ● Marker 3 Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Owner’s Manual 55 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Oops! A mistake! 56 Owner’s Manual Press immediately NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database list will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 135 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “158 Patrol”. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 301–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 107. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 27). Refer to pages 29–31 for information about playing chords. Split Point If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this point you can check the assigned voice and style. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. Owner’s Manual 57 Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Try Out the Easy Song Arranger You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song. Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009 Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song Arranger feature will appear on the display. As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall image of the song. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. NOTE • The score for Hallelujah Chorus is provided on page 120. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. 2 58 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. NOTE Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. • When playing song numbers 010, 011, and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Song start! 4 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. 5 Select a style. 6 Select a voice part. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected melody voice will be displayed. Hold for longer than a second 7 Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice changes. NOTE • If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button during style playback, the style will stop but the song will continue playing. Use the [START/STOP] button to stop playback completely. Owner’s Manual 59 Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved as user songs they can be played in the same way as the internal songs. User songs can also be saved to a USB flash memory device, as described on page 99. ■ Recordable Data 5 melody tracks and 1 Style (chord) track can be recorded. To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. • User songs are saved as SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0 files. Refer to page 107 for information on SMF files. ● SONG MEMORY (Track) [1]–[5] Record the melody parts. ● SONG MEMORY (Track) [A] Records the style pattern and chord parts. Melody Chords Specify track(s) and record Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track A ■ Track Mute This instrument allows you to choose whether recorded tracks will play back while you are recording or playing back other tracks (page 89). 60 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Up to approximately 30,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Record Your Own Performance Recording Procedure 1 From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display. CAUTION • If you record to track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Select button [1]–[3] if you want to record a dual voice. Split voices cannot be recorded. The selected track will be highlighted in the display. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. Owner’s Manual 61 Record Your Own Performance 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. Current measure NOTE • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 63) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Recording starts 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. NOTE • If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording a style track, an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. or When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. 5 Save the song. When recording is stopped a message asking if you want to save the song will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to save the song, or the [-/NO] button if you don’t want to save the song. If saved, the song will be stored as a MIDI file in song number 031–035. If you press the [-/NO] button in response to the confirmation message the song will not be saved as a MIDI file but will remain in the instrument’s memory until the power is turned off, so you have the option of converting the song to a MIDI file and saving it later. To do this press and hold the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears, then press the [+/YES] button. 62 Owner’s Manual CAUTION • The recorded Song data will be lost if you turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Record Your Own Performance ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 5 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the border around the track number disappears in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 6 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 32). 1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display. 2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ◆ To save a User Song to USB flash memory ➔ page 99. ● Data that cannot be recorded • Split voice • The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. Time signature, Style number, Style volume Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE From the SONG SELECT display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. Hold for longer than a second Press and hold Owner’s Manual 63 Record Your Own Performance 3 Press the [+] button to clear the song. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 From the SONG SELECT display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. Hold for longer than a second 3 64 Press the [+] button to clear the track. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. Owner’s Manual Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection, Sustain, Sound Type, Chord Fingering Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory—turn the power on by pressing the power switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. Power switch ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear User Songs as well as Song, Style, and Music Database files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the power switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. Power switch Owner’s Manual 65 Basic Operation Basic Operation Overall control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 1 Select a basic function. 2 Select an item or value. Display (pages 68, 69) ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. 66 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 2 Use the dial to select an item or value When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. The currently selected item is highlighted in the display. In this example the [VOICE] button has been pressed. ■Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● r Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. r Increase f Decrease The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. Example: VOICE SELECT Display r ] mark. f CATEGORY button [ CATEGORY button [ Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. Select the category shown here. The first voice in the selected category is selected. In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. ] mark. r ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. ● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f ● Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. 3 Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). Owner’s Manual 67 Basic Operation The Displays ● Display Names All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for different modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display. ● MAIN Display Title To Return To the MAIN Display Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display. You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel. r f ● FUNCTION Display (page 92) The FUNCTION display provides access to 49 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 67) to select 49 different groups of functions. Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required. Function item Value The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. 68 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation MAIN Display Items The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. * Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. A-B Repeat Tempo Appears when repeat playback is engaged. Measure Number Transpose Function ON/Off Icons Dual Appears when the Dual Voice is on. When this icon is showing a second voice is “layered” on and played with the main voice. Chord Display Split Style (Auto-accompaniment) Status (page 27) Registration Memory Status (page 90) Appears when the Split Voice is on. When this icon is showing different voices can be played to the left and right of the keyboard split point. Performance assistant technology Appears when the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button is pressed to turn accompaniment on after selecting a style. When showing the keyboard range to the left of the split point is used for accompaniment chord recognition. Shows the selected bank number. Shows the memory numbers that contain data. A border appears around the selected number. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. The style pattern name. Song Track Status (pages 60, 89) Appears when the performance assistant technology is on. Harmony Appears when Harmony is on. When this icon is showing harmony notes will be added to the main voice. File Control When this icon is showing you can control file operations. Highlighted during user song recording. The track(s) selected for recording are highlighted during user-song recording. Only tracks that contain data are displayed. A border appears around a selected track that is being played. No border appears around a Muted track. Owner’s Manual 69 Reference Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. The currently selected harmony type 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 137 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY ON/ OFF] button for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type will be displayed. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). Hold for longer than a second. ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 10, 13 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 27). Hold down two keys. • Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo) Keep holding down the keys. 70 Owner’s Manual • Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill) You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 94). Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for information about the available reverb types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. Selected reverb type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 138 for information about the available reverb types. Reverb Type item ● Adjusting the Reverb Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 93). Owner’s Manual 71 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. Selected chorus type. Chorus Type item ● Adjusting the Chorus Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 93). 72 Owner’s Manual Play with a Variety of Effects Adding DSP DSP is term of abbreviated form of Digital Signal Processor. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and Dual Voices. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it. 1 Use the [DSP ON/OFF] button to turn the DSP function on. The indicator lights when DSP is on. To turn DSP off, press the [DSP ON/OFF] button again. 3 Use the dial to select a DSP type. Refer to the DSP Type List on page 140 for information about the available DSP types. NOTE • When DSP is turned on, the optimum DSP type for the current Voice is automatically selected. • The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change differs depending on the selected Voice. • The DSP type is an overall setting–only one type can be selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-B Repeat function during song playback. 2 Press and hold the [DSP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The currently selected DSP type will be displayed. Currently selected DSP type. ● Adjusting the DSP Level You can individually adjust the amount of DSP that is applied to the main and dual voices. (See page 93). Hold for longer than a second DSP Type Owner’s Manual 73 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Sustain This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of damper operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn sustain on or off. NOTE • The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the sustain function is turned on. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 74 Owner’s Manual r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Sustain item. The current setting is displayed. Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the button just twice. Touch Response Sensitivity You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics —i.e. greater sensitivity. A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch response, or no level change no matter how hard or how soft you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Touch Sensitivity item. The currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. Touch Sensitivity item Owner’s Manual 75 Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 17). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Watch the display while changing songs and you will see that different voices are selected for each song. Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 33). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. 76 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Select a Sound Type Select a sound type for the internal speakers from piano sound or style sound. 1 Press and hold the [PIANO PRESET] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second. The currently selected sound type will appear. The currently selected sound type. 2 Use the dial to select the desired Sound Type. Select Piano when you want to play only a piano sound, or select Style when you want to play a style. NOTE • When using headphones the normal sound is applied. This function can also be set by using the [FUNCTION] button (see page 93). Owner’s Manual 77 Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpose item Tuning item Can be set between -12 and +12 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. 78 Owner’s Manual r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Can be set between -100 and +100 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 26 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) This instrument features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Main A/B Ending Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Owner’s Manual 79 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Appears when auto accompaniment is on. 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. The indicator will flash when the synchro start standby mode will be engaged. You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 31. Split point Accompaniment range ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. 80 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. The style will play while you are playing the keys Style playback will stop when you release the keys Owner’s Manual 81 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 054 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. Split point (054: F#2) 021 (A-1) 024 (C0) 036 (C1) 048 (C2) 060 (C3) 072 (C4) 084 (C5) 096 (C6) 108 (C7) Main voice Split voice 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 021(A-1) through 108 (C7). NOTE • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. • The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played. NOTE 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 82 Owner’s Manual r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Split point item. r f • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 92). Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 31). Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on after pressing the [STYLE] button. Accompaniment range Appears when auto accompaniment is on Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. Owner’s Manual 83 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Minor chord Cm Major chord CM Minor 3rd Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by this instrument.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th 84 Owner’s Manual Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th (b5) (b5) C m7 C7 Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Minor 7 th chord Major 7 th Major chord 7 th, suspended 4 th C 7sus4 Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6 Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C M7 Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 C M7 Display C (9) C9 C6 (9) C 69 * CM7 (9) C M79 * (#11) CM7#11 * (b5) Cb5 * (b5) Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 C M7 CM7b5 * Suspended fourth [sus4] 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm9 Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm711 * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 C (9) (9) (11) (9) (b5) C m7 Cdim7 1 - b3 - b5 C dim7 Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7 Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] Cm7b5 CmM7b5 * Diminished [dim] Seventh ninth [7(9)] CmM79 * C mM7 C dim (b5) Diminished seventh [dim7] Seventh [7] Cm7 Cm79 C7 Cdim C7 (b9) C7b9 C7 (b13) C7b13 (9) C 79 (#11) C7#11 (13) C713 (#9) 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7#9 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 Csus2 * * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. NOTE • Inversion of the m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Owner’s Manual 85 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard In “Play Along with a Style” on page 27 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however, chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 31) can be detected. 1 Press and hold the [ACMP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Chord Fingering”. Hold for longer than a second 86 Owner’s Manual 2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the performance assistant technology feature. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Owner’s Manual 87 Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Song volume item Can be set between 000 and 127 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 32) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • Repeat start and end points cannot be specified within the same measure While the song is stopped. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. 88 Owner’s Manual Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. To mute a track, press the appropriate track button (TRACK [1]–[5], [A]) button. Press the same button a second time to disengage track muting. No track number ... no data. Track number without border ... track contains data but is muted. Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted. Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously so that “LR” appears in the upper right corner of the MAIN display. Select the song and play it. 2 Use the dial to select the voice. As you select different melody voices, only the melody voice changes while the song will remain the same. 1 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MELODY L) display will appear so you can select the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates between VOICE SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L. Hold for longer than a second Owner’s Manual 89 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [MEMORY/ BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the bank and registration memory numbers. Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. Bank number NOTE • You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a computer as the backup file. NOTE NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. 90 Owner’s Manual Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level, DSP Level), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Sustain ON/OFF, DSP ON/OFF, DSP Type • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. You can check whether the panel settings are stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. Owner’s Manual 91 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 49 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 93. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. Direct numeric entry. 3 Select a function. Function category Previous item r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. Next item The selected function Value 92 Owner’s Manual • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 65 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 65. The Functions ● Function Setting List Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Split Point 021(A-1)–108(C7) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard), 4 (Off) Determines the sensitivity of the feature. Chord Fingering 1(Multi Finger), 2(FullKeyboard) Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual DSP Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. VOLUME OVERALL MAIN VOICE DUAL VOICE SPLIT VOICE Reverb Type 01–36 Determines the Reverb type, including off. (See the list on page 138) Chorus Type 01–45 Determines the Chorus type, including off. (See the list on page 139) DSP Type 001–239 Determines the DSP type, including off. (See the list on page 140) Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not sustain is always applied to the MAIN/DUAL voices. It is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. (page 74) Sound Type Piano/Style Determines the sound type, optimizing it either for a simple, pure piano sound, or for a wide, dynamic multi-instrument style sound. EFFECT Owner’s Manual 93 The Functions Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 137) Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. PAT P.A.T. Type CHORD, CHORD/FREE, MELODY, CHORD/MELODY Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list on page 39) PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 105). Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 105) External Clock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 105) Keyboard Out ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Setup YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator 01–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator 2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat. Bell ON/OFF Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF). Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Quantize 1(1/4 note), 2(1/4 note triplet), 3(1/8 note), 4(1/8 note triplet), 5(1/16 note), 6(1/16 note triplet), 7(1/32 note), 8(1/32 note triplet) Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer. Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is effective for songs in SMF format 0 and 1 transferred from a computer. Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. English/Japanese Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used. HARMONY MIDI METRONOME SCORE LESSON UTILITY LANGUAGE Language * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) 94 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, registered settings can be saved from or loaded into the instrument. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer Song, Style, and Music Database files to the instrument, where they can be selected and used in the same way as the internal data. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 96. Connecting a USB Flash Memory 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. 2 Check that the file control icon is shown in the MAIN display. Appears while the memory device is being mounted. File Control Icon A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 112 for an explanation of each message. You can go to the FILE CONTROL display from which you can access file operations by pressing the [MENU] button from this display. (Do not press this button now, but only when instructed to in the sections below.) Menu Reference Page Format 97 User File Save 98 User Song Save 99 Load 100 USB Delete 101 User Delete 102 NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. NOTE • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During style or song playback. • During a lesson. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory. Owner’s Manual 95 Saving and Loading Data ■ Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. ● Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: ● Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. http://download.yamaha.com/ NOTE • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. ● Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 97). CAUTION CAUTION • Do not close the key cover when a USB device is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Doing so can damage the USB device. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. 96 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Formatting USB Flash Memory New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or CAUTION • If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data when using the format function. the [+] button, and the format operation will begin. CAUTION 1 After connecting the USB flash memory to be formatted to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, check that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. • Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 2 NOTE Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Format item. The display prompts you for confirmation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the display prompts you for confirmation. You can press the [-] button at this point to cancel the operation. Owner’s Manual 97 Saving and Loading Data Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory This operation saves Registration Memory data as a “User File” to a USB flash memory device. The User File name will have a “.usr” extension which will not appear in the instrument’s display. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. r f 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but- Cursor left tons to locate the Regist Save item. A default file name will automatically be created. Delete character The dial selects characters Cursor right Cursor 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 6. NOTE • Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory. • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. • If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB flash memory to make more memory available (page 101), or use a different USB flash memory. • Refer to the “Messages” list on page 112 for other possible errors that might prevent you from completing the operation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 5 Change the file name as necessary. • The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [0] button moves it to the right. • Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. • The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor location. 98 Owner’s Manual 7 play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The file will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. CAUTION • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 8 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. Saving and Loading Data Save a User Song to USB Flash Memory This operation saves a user song (song numbers 031–035) to USB flash memory. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 7 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving Registration Memory data to USB Flash Memory” on page 98 for filename entry. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the User Song Save item. The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will be highlighted. Cursor The name of the file to be saved 8 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 9 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or The source user song name. the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The user song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. CAUTION 4 Use the dial to select the source user song. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first user song. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION SONG will be highlighted, and a default name will automatically be created. ● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 7. • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 10 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. Owner’s Manual 99 Saving and Loading Data Loading Files from a USB Flash Memory User files as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument. 4 Use the dial to select the file you want CAUTION • If you load a User File registration memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB flash memory before loading data that will overwrite it. 1 With the USB flash memory containing the file you want to load connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector, check that the File Control icon is shown in the MAIN display. to load. All user files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files, song files and music database files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash memory. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the load operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the Load item. the [+] button, and the load operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 100 Owner’s Manual Saving and Loading Data Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory This procedure deletes User, Style, Song, and Music Database files from a USB flash memory. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the file(s) you want to delete has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 4 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. All User files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files, song files and music database files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash memory. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the USB Delete item. play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. Owner’s Manual 101 Saving and Loading Data Delete User Data from the Instrument This procedure deletes the User Song as well as Style, Song, and Music Database files transferred from an external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the preset data. r f 1 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the User Delete item. Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB flash memory is connected to the instrument. All user songs will be displayed first, followed by the song, style and music database files. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. Playing Files Located on a USB Flash Memory IMPORTANT • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the file you want to play has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. USB flash memory (Root) Song File Song File Can be selected/played. 2 Press the [SONG], [STYLE] or [MUSIC DATABASE] button. Files of the corresponding type will be displayed. Song File Song File 3 Use the dial to select the file you want Cannot be selected/played. to play. 4 Play the selected file in the same way the internal files are played: press the [START/STOP] button, or play on the keyboard. 102 Owner’s Manual Connections Connectors q w USB TO HOST q USB TO DEVICE terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 96. w USB TO HOST terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 104 for more information. Owner’s Manual 103 Connections Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 105). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 107). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader (refer to included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”) and how to transfer song files (refer to page 107). USB TO HOST terminal Computer USB TO HOST USB cable 104 Owner’s Manual ■ Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Connections Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB TO HOST terminal USB terminal Computer USB TO HOST USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Item Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. NOTE 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. NOTE • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. Owner’s Manual 105 Connections ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. Hold for longer than a second. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* Local OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. NOTE r f • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 92). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). A#-1 A-1 C7: Fast forward B6: Start A6: Stop G6: Rewind F6: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E6: Metronome ON/OFF 106 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. Connections Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument Songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM, can be transferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the included “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Data Capacity: 1895KB 502 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. • Data Format Song: .mid SMF format 0/1 Style: .sty Music Database: .mfd Backup File: 09DP88.BUP ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 108. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. ● Backup file can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 109. Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. Owner’s Manual 107 Connections ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (refer to “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide”). At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and then “Flash memory”. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-down menu that appears. Doubleclick the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the CD-ROM drive q Click the “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. NOTE • Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory device—cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such files. w Double-click “SampleData” Folder ➝ “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. 108 Owner’s Manual e Click “Open” Connections 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. ■Transfer a Backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup” files containing Registration Memory and FUNCTION settings (page 65) to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “09DP88.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. r f ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0 and 1) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. CAUTION • The backup file is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all registration memory data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. Owner’s Manual 109 Appendix Troubleshooting ■ For the Instrument Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Check that nothing is connected to the [PHONES] jack on the bottom. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 105.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 87), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 105. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 93) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 82). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 131 or a style between 143–160 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143– 160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 64 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. The damper pedal has no effect even when damper pedal is pressed. The pedal cord may not be properly connected. Make sure securely insert the pedal cord into the [PEDAL] jack (page 116). The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or there are Japanese characters in the display messages. Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to English. (See page 16) The appropriate display does not appear when the [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is pressed. Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons. 110 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–10, 13 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 15–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 23–26 you need to play two notes at the same time. The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper area of the MAIN display and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Owner’s Manual 111 Messages LCD Message Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory. All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not. Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory. Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled. Can’t clear TrackA. Displayed when a track clear error occurs. Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs. Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back. Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application. Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not. Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader. Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged. End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed. Error! Displayed when writing has failed. Exit. Displayed when the record standby mode is exited because an inappropriate style has been selected during style record standby. “File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. “File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash memory. Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not. Formatting... Displayed while formatting. Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not. Loading... Displayed while loading data. Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording. “MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. “Now Writing... (Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise the data may be damaged.)” Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing. Doing so may result in data loss. 112 Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not. Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores and lyrics, or stopping recording. Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader. Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving. Doing so may result in data loss. Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not. Sending... Displayed while transmitting data. “Since the media is in use now, this function is not available.” Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Style data is too large to load. Indicates that style data cannot be loaded since the style data is too large. Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not. “The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. “The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. “The song data is too large to be converted to notation.” Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large. There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. “This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. [nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving block. NOTE • Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only. Owner’s Manual 113 Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Assemble the stand on a hard and flat floor with ample space. • Be sure to use the included screws only, and insert screws of the correct size in the correct hole locations. Do not use any other screws. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage or malfunction of the product. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready Remove all parts from the package and make sure you have all of the items. 6 x 20 mm long screws (x 4) A 6 x 16 mm short screws (x 4) 4 x 12 mm thin screws (x 2) Foamed styrol pads 4 x 20 mm tapping screws (x 4) B 4 x 10 mm thin screws (x 2) C AC power cord (x 1) Bundled pedal cord inside Headphone hanger (x 1) D E Cord holders (x 2) Adjuster (x 1) 114 Owner’s Manual Keyboard Stand Assembly 1 3 Attach the adjuster to C. 1-1 Align the tip of the adjuster with the screw hole, then screw in the adjuster all the way until it stops turning. You will adjust the height of the adjuster in Step 8. 1-2 Untie and straighten out the bundled cord. Attach B. 3-1 Place the lower side of B on each foot of D and E, then attach the upper side to D and E. 3-2 Attach the top of B to D and E by finger-tight- ening the thin screws (4 x 12mm). 3-3 While pushing the lower outside part of D and E towards each other, secure the bottom of B at each end using two tapping screws (4 x 20mm). Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in Step 7. 3-4 Insert the other two tapping screws (4 x 20mm) into the other two screw holes to secure B. 1-1 1-2 3-5 While pushing D and E towards each other, securely tighten the screws that were fingertightened in Step 3-2. C 2 3-2 3-5 Attach (finger-tighten) D and E to C. 2-1 Align D and E with each end of C. E 2-2 Attach D and E to C by finger-tightening the long screws (6 x 20mm). D B E 3-3 2-2 3-4 D C 4 Secure C. 4-1 Securely tighten the screws on C that were attached in Step 2-2. D B E C 4-1 Owner’s Manual 115 Keyboard Stand Assembly 5 7 Mount A. 5-1 Place your hands at least 15 cm from either end of A when positioning it. Connect the pedal cord and the power cord. 7-1 Insert the pedal cord plug to the pedal connec- tor from the rear. 7-2 Attach the cord holders to B, then clip the cord into the holders. 7-3 Use a vinyl tie to bundle the pedal cord. A 7-4 For models that feature a voltage selector: Set the voltage selector to an appropriate voltage. E D At least 15 cm 6 Secure A. 6-1 Adjust the position of A so that the left and right ends of A will project beyond D and E equally when seen from the front. 6-2 Secure A by tightening the short screws (6 x 16mm) from the front. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. WARNING • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to this instrument or result in improper operation. 7-5 Insert the AC power cord plug into the AC 6-1 A INLET. Projection of A L DA PE 7-1 A 6-2 7-3 7-5 116 Owner’s Manual 7-4 7-2 Keyboard Stand Assembly 8 Set the adjuster. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following. 8-1 Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm con- tact with the floor surface. • Are there any parts left over? ➔ Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is this instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➔ Move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does this instrument make a rattling noise when you shake it? ➔ Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? ➔ Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. 9 Attach the headphone hanger. 9-1 Install the headphone hanger using included two screws (4 x 10mm) as shown in the figure. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? ➔ Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. CAUTION • When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the key cover or top portion. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Do not hold here. ■ Remove the protective tapes Open the key cover and remove the protective tape on each side of the keyboard. Hold here. Owner’s Manual 117 Index Panel controls and terminals 118 Owner’s Manual r f +/– .................................................. 15, 67 ........................................................ 68 0–9 .................................................. 15, 67 A-B REPEAT ................................. 15, 88 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 15, 27 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 15, 67 DEMO ............................................ 15, 32 Dial ................................................. 15, 67 DSP ON/OFF ................................. 15, 73 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 15, 18 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 15, 58 EXECUTE ...................................... 15, 97 EXIT ............................................... 15, 68 FF ................................................... 15, 34 FILE CONTROL ........................... 15, 95 FUNCTION .................................... 15, 92 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 15, 70 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 15, 79 LCD CONTRAST ................................ 69 LESSON L, R ................................. 15, 51 LESSON START ........................... 15, 50 LYRICS .......................................... 15, 38 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 15, 79 MASTER VOLUME ........................... 15 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 15, 90 MENU ............................................ 15, 95 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 15, 23 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 15, 57 P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 15, 40, 48 PAUSE ........................................... 15, 34 PC ....................................................... 106 PEDAL ................................................. 15 PHONES .............................................. 15 PIANO RESET .............................. 15, 20 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 15, 60 REGIST. MEMORY ...................... 15, 90 REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 15, 56 REW ............................................... 15, 34 SCORE ........................................... 15, 37 SONG ............................................. 15, 33 SONG MEMORY .......................... 15, 61 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 15, 19 STANDBY/ON .................................... 15 START/STOP ................................ 15, 67 STYLE ............................... 15, 26–30, 79 SYNC START ......................... 15, 27, 80 SYNC STOP .................................. 15, 81 TEMPO/TAP ...................... 15, 23, 34, 75 USB TO DEVICE ........................ 15, 103 USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 104 VOICE ............................................ 15, 17 Alphabetical order A E A-B Repeat ...........................................88 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................27 Auto Accompaniment Range ................27 Auto-Accompaniment ..............27, 29, 31 Easy Chords ......................................... 31 Easy Song Arranger ............................. 58 Effect Type List ................................. 138 External Clock .............................. 94, 105 External Song ....................................... 36 B F Backup ..........................................65, 109 Bell ........................................................25 File Control .......................................... 95 File Name ............................................. 98 Flash Memory ...................................... 36 Format (File Control) ........................... 97 Function ................................... 68, 92–94 Function Display .................................. 68 C CD-ROM ............................................144 Chord ..................................29–31, 84–85 Chord Dictionary ..................................87 Chord Fingering ..............................31, 86 Chord root .............................................87 Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............87 Chord type (performance assistant technology) ...................39–40 Chord/Free type (performance assistant technology) ...................39, 42 Chord/Melody type (performance assistant technology) ...................39, 46 Chorus ...................................................72 Chorus Type .......................................139 Computer ............................104–105, 107 G Grade .................................................... 53 H Harmony ............................................... 70 Harmony Type ................................... 138 Harmony Volume ................................. 94 Headphones .......................................... 12 I Initial Send ......................................... 107 Initialization ......................................... 65 D Default Setting ......................................92 Delete (Song Track) ..............................64 Delete (USB flash memory) ...............101 Delete (User Data) ..............................102 Delete (User Song) ...............................63 Demo ....................................................32 Demo Cancel ........................................94 Display ............................................68–69 Double-Staff Score ...............................37 Drum Kit ...............................................22 Drum Kit List ......................................132 DSP .......................................................73 DSP Type ......................................73, 140 Dual Chorus Level ................................93 Dual Octave ..........................................93 Dual Pan ...............................................93 Dual Reverb Level ................................93 Dual Voice ............................................18 Dual Volume .........................................93 K Keyboard Out ............................... 94, 105 Keyboard Stand Assembly ................. 114 L Language .............................................. 16 Lesson .................................................. 50 Load ................................................... 100 Local ............................................. 94, 105 L-Part ........................................... 94, 109 Lyric ..................................................... 38 M Main Chorus Level ............................... 93 MAIN Display ...................................... 68 Main Octave ......................................... 93 Main Pan .............................................. 93 Main Reverb Level ............................... 93 Main Voice ........................................... 17 Main Volume ....................................... 93 Measure ................................................ 69 Melody ........................................... 37, 49 Index Melody Score ....................................... 37 Melody type (performance assistant technology) .................. 39, 44 Melody Voice ................................. 59, 89 Messages ............................................ 112 Metronome ........................................... 23 MIDI ................................................... 105 MIDI Data Format .................................. 7 MIDI Implementation Chart ................... 7 Music Database .................................... 57 Music Rest ............................................ 10 Mute ..................................................... 89 N notation ................................................. 69 O One Touch Setting ................................ 76 P P.A.T. Type .................................... 39, 94 PC Mode ............................................. 106 Pedal ..................................................... 21 performance assistant technology ........ 39 Preset Song ............................... 32, 35–36 Q Quantize ............................................... 94 R Recording ............................................. 60 Registration Memory ........................... 90 Remote control ................................... 106 Repeat ............................................. 56, 88 Reverb .................................................. 71 Reverb Type ....................................... 138 R-Part ........................................... 94, 109 Specifications ......................................144 Split Chorus Level ................................93 Split Octave ..........................................93 Split Pan ................................................93 Split Point .......................................19, 82 Split Reverb Level ................................93 Split Voice ............................................19 Split Volume .........................................93 Standard Chords ...................................31 Style ..........................................26, 29, 79 Style File .............................................100 Style List .............................................134 Style Out .......................................94, 105 Style Volume ........................................83 Sustain ............................................74, 93 Synchro Start ..................................27, 80 Synchro Stop .........................................81 T Tempo .............................................34, 75 TimeSignature (Denominator, Numerator) ...............24 Touch Response ....................................75 Touch Sensitivity ..................................75 Track .....................................................60 Track Clear ...........................................64 Transfer .......................................105, 107 Transpose ..............................................78 Troubleshooting ..................................110 Tuning ...................................................78 U USB ....................................................103 USB-MIDI driver .................................11 User file ........................................98, 100 User File Save .......................................98 User Song .......................................36, 60 V S Save (User File) .................................... 98 Save (User Song) .................................. 99 Score ....................................... 37, 49, 120 Single-Staff Score ................................ 37 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................. 107 Song ...................................................... 33 Song Clear ............................................ 63 Song List .............................................. 35 Song Memory ................................. 60–61 Song Out ....................................... 94, 105 Song Volume ........................................ 88 Sound Type .................................... 77, 93 Voice .....................................................17 Voice List ...........................................126 X XF .....................................................6, 38 XGlite .....................................................6 Owner’s Manual 119 Scores Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 120 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 121 Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 122 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 123 Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD/FREE 124 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Scores / Noten / Partitions / Partituras Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 125 Voice List Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 64-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 64 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). ■ Maximale Polyphonie ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Das Instrument verfügt über eine maximale Polyphonie von 64 Noten. Dies bedeutet, daß das Instrument unabhängig von den aktivierten Funktionen maximal 64 Noten gleichzeitig spielen kann. Eine bestimmte Anzahl der verfügbaren Noten wird von der automatischen Begleitung belegt; bei deren Einsatz verringert sich somit die Anzahl der für das Spiel auf der Klaviatur verfügbaren Noten entsprechend. Das Gleiche gilt für Split Voices und Song-Funktion. Wenn die maximale Polyphonie überschritten wird, werden die am frühesten gespielten Noten ausgeschaltet und die zuletzt gespielten Noten haben Vorrang (Last Note Priority). ■ Polyphonie maximale ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Le YDP-V240 dispose d’une polyphonie maximale de 64 notes. Cela signifie que l’instrument peut reproduire un nombre maximal de 64 voix à la fois, indépendamment des fonctions utilisées. L’accompagnement automatique fait appel à un certain nombre de notes disponibles. Il s’ensuit que lorsque l’accompagnement automatique est utilisé, le nombre total de notes disponibles pour l’interprétation au clavier est réduit en conséquence. Cela s’applique aussi aux fonctions Split Voice (Voix partagées) et Song (Morceau). Lorsque la polyphonie maximale est dépassée, les notes jouées en premier ne produisent aucun son ; seules les notes interprétées en dernier sont audibles (priorité à la dernière note). ■ Polifonía máxima ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● El instrumento tiene una polifonía máxima de 64 notas. Esto significa que puede tocar un máximo de 64 notas a la vez, independientemente de las funciones que se usen. El acompañamiento automático utiliza una parte de las notas disponibles, de forma que cuando éste se utiliza el número de notas disponibles se reduce proporcionalmente. Lo mismo puede aplicarse a las funciones Split Voice (Voz de división) y Song (Canción). Si se excede la polifonía máxima, las notas tocadas con anterioridad se cortan y se da prioridad a las notas más recientes (prioridad de la última nota). 126 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the damper pedal is held. HINWEIS • In der Voice-Liste sind für jede Voice MIDI-Programmwechselnummern enthalten. Verwenden Sie diese Programmwechselnummern, wenn Sie das Instrument über MIDI von einem externen Gerät aus ansteuern. • Die Programmnummern 001 bis 128 hängen direkt mit den MIDI-Programmwechsel-Nummern 000 bis 127 zusammen. Das bedeutet: Programmnummern und Programmwechsel-Nummern unterscheiden sich mit einem Wert von 1. Denken Sie bei diesen Überlegungen daran. • Einige Voices klingen fortwährend, oder klingen sehr lange aus, nachdem die Tasten losgelassen wurden, während das Dämpferpedal gedrückt ist. NOTE • La liste des voix comporte des numéros de changement de programme MIDI pour chaque voix. Utilisez ces derniers pour commander le YDP-V240 à partir d’un périphérique MIDI. • Les numéros de programme 001 à 128 correspondent aux numéros de changement de programme MIDI 000 à 127. Cela signifie que les numéros de programme et les numéros de changement de programme sont décalés de 1. N’oubliez pas de tenir compte de cet écart. • Certaines voix peuvent être entendues en continu ou présenter une longue atténuation une fois que les notes ont été relâchées et tandis que la pédale de maintien est enfoncée. NOTA • La lista de voces incluye números de cambio de programa MIDI para cada voz. Utilice estos números de cambio de programa cuando toque el instrumento a través del MIDI desde un dispositivo externo. • Números de programa de 001 a 128 directamente relacionados con los números de cambio de programa MIDI de 000 a 127. Esto quiere decir que los números de programa y los números de cambio de programa difieren en un valor de 1, elemento que se debe tener en cuenta. • Después de soltar las notas, algunas voces podrían sonar de forma continuada o presentar una larga disminución mientras se mantiene pisado el pedal amortiguador. Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces ● Panel Voice List / Verzeichnis der BedienfeldVoices / Liste des voix de panneau / Lista de voces del panel Voice No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 122 001 Natural! Grand 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano 000 112 001 Grand Piano 000 112 002 Bright Piano 000 112 007 Harpsichord 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano 000 113 003 CP 80 E.PIANO 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano 000 120 005 Phase Electric Piano 000 113 006 Hyper Tines 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano 000 113 005 Tremolo Electric Piano 000 114 008 E.Clavichord 000 112 008 Clavi 000 113 008 WahClavi ORGAN 000 118 019 Cool! Organ 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2 000 112 019 Rock Organ 000 114 019 Purple Organ 000 112 018 Click Organ 000 116 017 Bright Organ 000 127 019 Theater Organ 000 121 020 16'+2' Organ 000 120 020 16'+4' Organ 000 113 020 Chapel Organ 000 112 020 Church Organ 000 112 021 Reed Organ ACCORDION 000 112 022 Musette Accordion 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion 000 113 024 Bandoneon 000 113 023 Modern Harp 000 112 023 Harmonica GUITAR 000 112 025 Classical Guitar 000 112 026 Folk Guitar 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar 000 112 028 Clean Guitar 000 113 027 Octave Guitar 000 112 029 Muted Guitar 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar BASS 000 112 034 Finger Bass 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass 000 112 035 Pick Bass 000 112 036 Fretless Bass 000 112 037 Slap Bass 000 112 039 Synth Bass 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass 000 113 040 Dance Bass Voice No. 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) STRINGS 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra 000 112 049 String Ensemble 000 112 050 Chamber Strings 000 113 050 Slow Strings 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings 000 112 051 Synth Strings 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 112 041 Violin 000 112 043 Cello 000 112 044 Contrabass 000 112 047 Harp 000 112 106 Banjo 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 000 112 053 Choir 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble 000 112 055 Air Choir 000 112 054 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet 000 118 067 Growl Sax 000 112 067 Tenor Sax 000 112 066 Alto Sax 000 112 065 Soprano Sax 000 112 068 Baritone Sax 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 112 072 Clarinet 000 112 069 Oboe 000 112 070 English Horn 000 112 071 Bassoon TRUMPET 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet 000 112 057 Trumpet 000 112 058 Trombone 000 113 058 Trombone Section 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet 000 112 061 French Horn 000 112 059 Tuba BRASS 000 112 062 Brass Section 000 113 062 Big Band Brass 000 113 063 80’s Brass 000 119 062 Mellow Horns 000 114 063 Techno Brass 000 112 063 Synth Brass FLUTE 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute 000 112 074 Flute 000 112 073 Piccolo 000 112 076 Pan Flute 000 112 075 Recorder 000 112 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 112 081 Square Lead 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 115 082 Analogon 000 119 082 Fargo 000 112 099 Star Dust 000 112 086 Voice Lead 000 112 101 Brightness Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 127 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) SYNTH PAD 000 118 089 SweetHeaven 000 112 092 Xenon Pad 000 112 095 Equinox 000 112 089 Fantasia 000 113 090 Dark Moon 000 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 000 112 012 Vibraphone 000 112 013 Marimba 000 112 014 Xylophone 000 112 115 Steel Drums 000 112 009 Celesta 000 112 011 Music Box 000 112 015 Tubular Bells 000 112 048 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2 127 000 009 Room Kit 127 000 017 Rock Kit 127 000 025 Electronic Kit 127 000 026 Analog Kit 127 000 113 Dance Kit 127 000 033 Jazz Kit 127 000 041 Brush Kit 127 000 049 Symphony Kit 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2 ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List / Liste der XGlite-Voices/optionale XGlite-Voices* / Voix XGlite/liste des voix* XGlite en option / Lista de voces de XGlite/voces opcionales de XGlite* Voice No. 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 *159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 128 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 000 000 001 Grand Piano 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP 000 040 001 Piano Strings 000 041 001 Dream 000 000 002 Bright Piano 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP 000 032 003 Detuned CP80 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano 000 000 007 Harpsichord 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2 000 000 008 Clavi 000 001 008 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 000 000 009 Celesta 000 000 010 Glockenspiel 000 000 011 Music Box 000 064 011 Orgel 000 000 012 Vibraphone 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP 000 000 013 Marimba 000 001 013 Marimba KSP 000 064 013 Sine Marimba 000 097 013 Balimba 000 098 013 Log Drums 000 000 014 Xylophone 000 000 015 Tubular Bells 000 096 015 Church Bells 000 097 015 Carillon 000 000 016 Dulcimer 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2 000 096 016 Cimbalom 000 097 016 Santur XG ORGAN 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 000 040 017 16+2'2/3 000 064 017 Organ Bass 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2 000 000 018 Percussive Organ 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ 000 033 018 Light Organ 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2 000 000 019 Rock Organ Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 064 019 Rotary Organ 000 065 019 Slow Rotary 000 066 019 Fast Rotary 000 000 020 Church Organ 000 032 020 Church Organ 3 000 035 020 Church Organ 2 000 040 020 Notre Dame 000 064 020 Organ Flute 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute 000 000 021 Reed Organ 000 040 021 Puff Organ 000 000 022 Accordion 000 000 023 Harmonica 000 032 023 Harmonica 2 000 000 024 Tango Accordion 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 000 096 025 Ukulele 000 000 026 Steel Guitar 000 035 026 12-string Guitar 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 000 096 026 Mandolin 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar 000 032 027 Jazz Amp 000 000 028 Clean Guitar 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar 000 000 029 Muted Guitar 000 040 029 Funk Guitar 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar 000 045 029 Jazz Man 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 000 000 034 Finger Bass 000 018 034 Finger Dark 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2 000 065 034 Modulated Bass 000 000 035 Pick Bass 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass 000 000 036 Fretless Bass 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass Voice No. *268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass 000 041 040 DX Bass XG STRINGS 000 000 041 Violin 000 008 041 Slow Violin 000 000 042 Viola 000 000 043 Cello 000 000 044 Contrabass 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings 000 040 045 Suspense Strings 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp 000 040 047 Yang Chin 000 000 048 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 000 000 049 Strings 1 000 003 049 Stereo Strings 000 008 049 Slow Strings 000 035 049 60’s Strings 000 040 049 Orchestra 000 041 049 Orchestra 2 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra 000 045 049 Velocity Strings 000 000 050 Strings 2 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings 000 008 050 Legato Strings 000 040 050 Warm Strings 000 041 050 Kingdom 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2 000 000 053 Choir Aahs 000 003 053 Stereo Choir 000 032 053 Mellow Choir 000 040 053 Choir Strings 000 000 054 Voice Oohs 000 000 055 Synth Voice 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2 000 041 055 Choral 000 064 055 Analog Voice 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2 000 064 056 Impact XG BRASS 000 000 057 Trumpet 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet 000 000 058 Trombone 000 018 058 Trombone 2 000 000 059 Tuba 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet 000 000 061 French Horn 000 006 061 French Horn Solo 000 032 061 French Horn 2 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra 000 000 062 Brass Section 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2 000 018 064 Soft Brass 000 041 064 Choir Brass XG REED 000 000 065 Soprano Sax 000 000 066 Alto Sax 000 040 066 Sax Section 000 000 067 Tenor Sax Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 129 Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 130 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 000 068 Baritone Sax 000 000 069 Oboe 000 000 070 English Horn 000 000 071 Bassoon 000 000 072 Clarinet XG PIPE 000 000 073 Piccolo 000 000 074 Flute 000 000 075 Recorder 000 000 076 Pan Flute 000 000 077 Blown Bottle 000 000 078 Shakuhachi 000 000 079 Whistle 000 000 080 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 000 000 081 Square Lead 000 006 081 Square Lead 2 000 008 081 LM Square 000 018 081 Hollow 000 019 081 Shroud 000 064 081 Mellow 000 065 081 Solo Sine 000 066 081 Sine Lead 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth 000 020 082 Big Lead 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog 000 000 083 Calliope Lead 000 065 083 Pure Lead 000 000 084 Chiff Lead 000 000 085 Charang Lead 000 064 085 Distorted Lead 000 000 086 Voice Lead 000 000 087 Fifths Lead 000 035 087 Big Five 000 000 088 Bass & Lead 000 016 088 Big & Low 000 064 088 Fat & Perky 000 065 088 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 000 000 089 New Age Pad 000 064 089 Fantasy 000 000 090 Warm Pad 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad 000 000 092 Choir Pad 000 066 092 Itopia 000 000 093 Bowed Pad 000 000 094 Metallic Pad 000 000 095 Halo Pad 000 000 096 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 000 000 097 Rain 000 065 097 African Wind 000 066 097 Carib 000 000 098 Sound Track 000 027 098 Prologue 000 000 099 Crystal 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp 000 014 099 Popcorn 000 018 099 Tiny Bells 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes 000 041 099 Clear Bells Voice No. 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 042 099 Chorus Bells 000 065 099 Soft Crystal 000 070 099 Air Bells 000 071 099 Bell Harp 000 072 099 Gamelimba 000 000 100 Atmosphere 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere 000 019 100 Hollow Release 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano 000 064 100 Nylon Harp 000 065 100 Harp Vox 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad 000 000 101 Brightness 000 000 102 Goblins 000 064 102 Goblins Synth 000 065 102 Creeper 000 067 102 Ritual 000 068 102 To Heaven 000 070 102 Night 000 071 102 Glisten 000 096 102 Bell Choir 000 000 103 Echoes 000 000 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 000 000 105 Sitar 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar 000 035 105 Sitar 2 000 097 105 Tamboura 000 000 106 Banjo 000 028 106 Muted Banjo 000 096 106 Rabab 000 097 106 Gopichant 000 098 106 Oud 000 000 107 Shamisen 000 000 108 Koto 000 096 108 Taisho-kin 000 097 108 Kanoon 000 000 109 Kalimba 000 000 110 Bagpipe 000 000 111 Fiddle 000 000 112 Shanai XG PERCUSSIVE 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell 000 096 113 Bonang 000 097 113 Altair 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal 000 000 114 Agogo 000 000 115 Steel Drums 000 097 115 Glass Percussion 000 098 115 Thai Bells 000 000 116 Woodblock 000 096 116 Castanets 000 000 117 Taiko Drum 000 096 117 Gran Cassa 000 000 118 Melodic Tom 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2 000 065 118 Real Tom 000 066 118 Rock Tom 000 000 119 Synth Drum 000 064 119 Analog Tom 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 000 000 121 Fret Noise 000 000 122 Breath Noise Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Voice List / Voice-Liste / Liste des voix / Lista de voces Voice No. 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 Bank Select MIDI Program MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 000 123 000 000 124 000 000 125 000 000 126 000 000 127 000 000 128 064 000 001 064 000 002 064 000 004 064 000 017 064 000 033 064 000 034 064 000 035 064 000 036 064 000 037 064 000 038 064 000 049 064 000 050 064 000 051 064 000 056 064 000 065 064 000 066 064 000 067 064 000 068 064 000 069 064 000 070 064 000 071 064 000 081 064 000 082 064 000 083 064 000 084 064 000 085 064 000 086 064 000 087 064 000 088 064 000 089 064 000 090 064 000 091 064 000 097 064 000 098 064 000 099 064 000 100 064 000 101 064 000 113 064 000 114 064 000 115 064 000 116 Voice Name Seashore Bird Tweet Telephone Ring Helicopter Applause Gunshot Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap Flute Key Click Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Maou Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Split Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. Voice-Nummern mit einem Stern (*) sind optionale Xglite-Voices. Le numéro de voix porteur d’un astérisque (*) est une voix XGlite en option. El número de voz con un asterisco (*) es una voz opcional de XGlite. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 131 Drum Kit List Drum Kit List / Drum Kit-Liste / Liste des kits de • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “132: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 132 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 • „ “ bedeutet, dass der Schlagzeugklang gleich „Standard Kit 1“ ist. • Jede Perkussionsnote belegt eine Note. • Die MIDI-Note # und Note sind in Wirklichkeit eine Octave tiefer als hier aufgeführt. Beispiel: In „132: Standard Kit 1“ entspricht die „Seq Click H“ (Note# 36/Note C1) der Note (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Mit „O“ bezeichnete Tasten hören sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie losgelassen werden. • Stimmen mit derselben Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) können nicht gleichzeitig gespielt werden. (Diese Stimmen sind dazu gedacht, wechselweise gespielt zu werden.) 132 127/000/001 133 127/000/002 134 127/000/009 135 127/000/017 136 127/000/025 137 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 percussion / Lista de juegos de batería • « » indique que les sonorités de percussion sont identiques à celles de « Standard Kit 1 ». • Chaque voix de percussion utilise une note unique. • Le numéro de note MIDI (Note #) et la note MIDI se situent en réalité à une octave inférieure à celle qui est indiquée dans la liste. Par exemple, dans « 132 : Standard Kit 1 », « Seq Click H » (Note# 36/Note C1) correspond à (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off : pour les touches signalées par « O », l’émission de sons s’arrête instantanément aussitôt que les touches sont relâchées. • Les voix portant un même numéro de note alternative (*1 ... 4) ne peuvent pas être jouées simultanément. (Elles sont en effet conçues pour être interprétées en alternance). Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 • “ ” indica que el sonido de batería es el mismo que el “Standard Kit 1”. • Cada sonido de percusión utiliza una nota. • La nota MIDI # y la nota son en realidad una octava menos de lo que aparece en la lista. Por ejemplo, en “132: Standard Kit 1”, el “Seq Click H” (Nota# 36/Nota C1) corresponde a (Nota# 24/Nota C0). • Tecla desactivada: las teclas marcadas con “O” dejan de sonar en el momento en que se sueltan. • Los sonidos con el mismo número alterno de nota (*1 ... 4) no pueden tocarse simultáneamente. (Están diseñados para tocarse alternativamente el uno con el otro.) 132 127/000/001 138 127/000/113 139 127/000/033 140 127/000/041 141 127/000/049 142 126/000/001 143 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 133 Style List Style List / Style-Liste / Liste des styles / Lista de estilos Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 134 Style Name 8BEAT ChartPianoPop BritPopRock 8BeatModern Cool8Beat Classic8Beat 60’sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat BubblegumPop BritPopSwing OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PianoPopShufle PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight BALLAD ChartPianoBld PopGtrBallad 80’sBallad PianoBallad LoveSong 6-8ModernEP 6-8SlowRock 6-8OrchBallad OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 DANCE ClubBeat Electronica FunkyHouse MellowHipHop EuroTrance Ibiza DreamDance TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly Style No. 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Style Name SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands SWING&JAZZ TradJazzPiano1 TradJazzPiano2 PianoBarBlues BigBandFast BigBandMedium BigBandBallad BigBandShuffle JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 OrchestraSwing Five-Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6-8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6-8Blues COUNTRY 70’sCountry Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing CountryBallad Country2-4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenco RumbaIsland Reggae BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Style No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Style Name Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Jive TRADITIONAL USMarch 6-8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian WALTZ ItalianWaltz MariachiWaltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWaltzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2-4 Learning4-4 Learning6-8 Fun 3-4 Fun 4-4 PIANIST Stride PianoBlues1 PianoBlues2 PianoRag PianoRock&Roll PianoBoogie PianoJazzWaltz PianoJazzBld Arpeggio Musical Habanera SlowRock 8BtPianoBallad PianoMarch 6-8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PianoBeguine PianoSwing Music Database List Music Database List / Musikdatenbankliste / Liste des bases de données musicales / Lista de la base de datos musical MDB No. MDB Name ALL TIME HITS 1 Jude Hey 2 New UK 3 MyLoving 4 All OK 5 Buttercp 6 JustCall 7 CheepChp 8 Daddy's 9 Dance? 10 GetBack 11 GtrWheel 12 HighTide 13 IWasBorn 14 Sailing 15 BluJeans 16 Holiday 17 Imagine 18 LoveMe 19 LetItBld 20 LdyMdona 21 YelowSub 22 Marriage 23 MovinOut 24 My Shell 25 NowNever 26 DoLoveMe 27 TcktRide 28 SeeClear 29 Masachus 30 Hard Day 31 USA Pie 32 Norway 33 YesterBd MODERN POP 34 Watches 35 SoundMPH 36 Hold Us 37 Unfound 38 NeedSome 39 PrtTmLvr 40 MoonShdw 41 NikitSng 42 Sure of 43 Off Day 44 Tell Her 45 GirlsMne 46 NeedLove POP CLASSICS 47 Standing 48 RainLaff 49 Sunshine 50 ForNamdo 51 ThankFor 52 ManPiano 53 CoinLane 54 LovesYou 55 Tmbourin 56 Alone 57 GldField 58 Raindrop 59 SultanSw 60 Life'sWk 61 TopWorld MDB No. MDB Name 62 WatchGrl POP BALLAD 63 WnderLnd 64 CanIStop 65 EvryTime 66 IvoryAnd 67 TheWorld 68 LovWoman 69 Dolannes 70 Madigan 71 Paradise 72 Whisper BALLAD 73 AllOdds 74 AtonalFl 75 Hero 76 Woman 77 RunToYou 78 LoveOfAl 79 CndleWnd 80 Cavatina 81 Cherish 82 ToLoveMe 83 YouKnow 84 Evrythng 85 EyesOfBl 86 Hello 87 BeThere 88 FlyAway 89 LoveYou 90 NeverLet 91 JustOnce 92 IfYouGo 93 SavingAl 94 InTheDrk 95 LovePwr 96 Vision 97 Beautifl 98 AllAlone 99 Opposite 100 BeHonest 101 SayYou 102 SayNthng 103 Stranger 104 OneDay 105 TheBayou 106 ThisSong 107 Distance 108 ThisWay 109 LoveGone 110 Inspirng 111 TrueColr ROCK & ROLL 112 ShakenUp 113 Beethovn 114 HurryLov 115 BeCruel 116 Jumping 117 Countdwn 118 SuePeggy 119 Champion 120 Jailhous 121 BlueShoe 122 Rockin24 MDB No. MDB Name 123 Shouting 124 Rock&Rll 125 HonkyTnk OLDIES 126 Daydream 127 Sumertme 128 Diana's 129 Uptown 130 Apache 131 IGotIt 132 Tonight 133 MyPillow 134 NoRain 135 FinalDance 136 SlpnLion 137 Ghetto 138 LipsLcky 139 PrettyWm 140 TikiGtr 141 TurnThre 142 Sherry DANCE & DISCO 143 Babylon 144 Goodbye 145 Catch22 146 DISCO 147 Survival 148 TheNavy 149 DontHide 150 Celebrat 151 LondonRU 152 10,2 Sun 153 ShakeYou 154 Believe 155 BoySumer 156 I'mSexy 157 StuffHot SWING & JAZZ 158 Patrol 159 Charles 160 GiveLove 161 Rhythm 162 LOVE 163 LeroyBad 164 Caraban 165 Misbehav 166 Safari 167 Smiling 168 SoWhatIs 169 TimeGone 170 TasteHny 171 Sandman 172 Tunisian 173 TwoFoot 174 MyBaby R&B 175 AsPlayed 176 BabyGrov 177 Highwy66 178 SweetCHI 179 JustU&Me 180 ManLoves 181 OurLove 182 Wish I MDB No. MDB Name COUNTRY 183 OnTheRd 184 Breathe 185 InMyMind 186 ContryHw 187 GreenGrs 188 EverNeed 189 Lonesome 190 Lucille 191 HomeRng 192 Tennesse LATIN 193 Bananabt 194 DanceMng 195 DntWorry 196 Jamaica 197 FleaSpa 198 I'mPola 199 MamboJm 200 OneNote 201 PasoCani 202 SayNoMor 203 Beguine 204 Tijuana 205 Picture ENTERTAINMENT 206 OnTheHil 207 Barnacle 208 Califrag 209 DadClock 210 DanceLd 211 DnceFire 212 BigCntry 213 Cabaret 214 OdeToJoy 215 Mi-Re-Do 216 MyPrince 217 Necesary 218 NoBuiz 219 NoisyOld 220 Sleigh 221 RockBaby 222 Magnifiq 223 Magnfcnt 224 SilentNt 225 Nabucco 226 Standing 227 SummerPl 228 Christms 229 Favorite 230 Tubbie 231 Turkish 232 12OClock WALTZ & TRADITIONAL 233 Blk&Whte 234 CanCan 235 Charmain 236 Musicbox 237 Clementn 238 Doodah! 239 Dreamer 240 EnterRag 241 Birthday 242 MaryLamb MDB No. MDB Name 243 Donald's 244 MoonWlz 245 MoulinHt 246 Sunshine 247 PieceOf 248 GreenSlv 249 TakeFour 250 TexRose 251 ThePolka 252 Scarboro 253 Edelweis 254 AroundWd 255 Whatever 256 Yankee's WORLD 257 Hawaii 258 D'amor 259 ElCondor 260 GoodbyRm 261 ILandOn 262 ItalyBel 263 Cucarumb 264 Puntuali 265 Cielito 266 ItalySun 267 SantaLuc 268 Trumpetr 269 VanMass PIANIST 270 ItalySun 271 BeGood 272 Chaie's 273 Flower 274 Frenetic 275 Highwy66 276 Leaves 277 Miload 278 Cabaret 279 Wonderfl 280 Submarin 281 Mi-Re-Do 282 MoreRhum 283 NoBuiz 284 BeatifulSn 285 OhBlah 286 Charades 287 Sally's 288 Nabucco 289 Spanish 290 SunnyStr 291 MistyFln 292 LdnBridg 293 GrndClck 294 Importnc 295 Snowman 296 Favorite 297 SugerSpn 298 Washngtn 299 ThisWay 300 ZipperD Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 135 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM / Songs auf der beiliegenden CD-ROM / Morceaux disponibles sur le CD-ROM fourni / Canciones incluidas en el CD-ROM proporcionado File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Frühlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A. Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S. Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. Easy Song Arranger kann nur zusammen mit Songs verwendet werden, die Akkorddaten enthalten. La fonction Easy Song Arranger ne s’utilise qu’avec des morceaux comportant des données d’accord. La función Easy Song Arranger (arreglos sencillos de canciones) sólo puede utilizarse con canciones que incluyan datos de acordes. 136 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Harmony Type List Harmony Type List / Liste der Harmony-Typen / Liste des types d’harmonie / Lista de tipos de armonías No. Harmony Type 1 01(Standard Duet) 2 02(Standard Trio) 3 03(Full Chord) 4 04(Rock Duet) 5 05(Country Duet) 6 06(Country Trio) 7 07(Block) 8 08(4-Way Close 1) 9 09(4-Way Close 2) 10 10(4-Way Open) 11 11(1+5) 12 12(Octave) 13 13(Strum) 14 14(Multi Assign) 15 15(Echo 1/4) 16 16(Echo 1/6) 17 17(Echo 1/8) 18 18(Echo 1/12) 19 19(Tremolo 1/8) 20 20(Tremolo 1/12) 21 21(Tremolo 1/16) 22 22(Tremolo 1/32) 23 23(Trill 1/12) 24 24(Trill 1/16) 25 25(Trill 1/24) 26 26(Trill 1/32) Description Harmony types 01–10, 13 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. Die Harmony-Typen 01 bis 10, 13 sind Tonhöheneffekte und bereichern eine monophon im rechten Tastaturbereich gespielte Melodie um ein-, zwei- oder dreistimmige Harmonien. Diese Typen werden nur erzeugt, wenn Akkorde im Tastaturbereich für die Begleitung gespielt werden. Les types d’effets Harmony 01–10, 13 sont des effets basés sur la hauteur et ajoutent des harmonies à une, deux ou trois notes à la mélodie à une seule note jouée de la main droite. Ces effets ne sont audibles que lorsque des accords sont joués dans la section d’accompagnement automatique du clavier. Los tipos de armonía 01–10, 13 se basan en el tono y añaden armonías de una, dos o tres notas a la melodía de una sola nota tocada en la parte de la mano derecha. Estos tipos sólo suenan cuando se tocan acordes en la sección del acompañamiento automático del teclado. Types 15–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 34). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Echo effect Types (15–18) create delayed repeats of each note played. • The Tremolo effect Types (19–22) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Trill effect Types (23–26) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. Die Harmony-Typen 15 bis 26 sind Rhythmuseffekte und erzeugen im Takt zur Begleitautomatik Verzierungen oder verzögerte Wiederholungen. Der jeweilige Harmony-Effekt wird sowohl bei eingeschalteter als auch bei ausgeschalteter automatischer Bass/Akkord-Begleitung erzeugt; die Effektgeschwindigkeit hängt jedoch stets von der aktuellen Tempoeinstellung ab (Seite 34). Dank der spezifischen Notenwerte der einzelnen Harmony-Typen können Sie den Effekt präzise mit dem Rhythmus synchronisieren. Es gibt auch Triolen-Einstellungen: 1/6 = Viertelnotentriolen, 1/12 = Achtelnotentriolen, 1/24 = Sechzehntelnotentriolen. • Die Echo-Effekttypen (15 bis 18) erzeugen verzögerte Wiederholungen jeder gespielten Note. • Mit den Tremolo-Effekttypen (19 bis 22) werden alle gehaltenen Noten (maximal vier Töne) wiederholt. • Die Triller-Effekttypen (23 bis 26) erzeugen Triller (zwei Töne in schnellem Wechsel), wenn zwei Tasten gehalten werden. Les types 15–26 sont des effets reposant sur le rythme qui ajoutent des embellissements ou des répétitions retardées synchronisées avec l’accompagnement automatique. Ces types d’effets sont audibles que l’accompagnement automatique soit activé ou non. Cependant, la vitesse réelle de l’effet dépend du réglage du tempo (page 34). La valeur individuelle des notes pour chaque type vous permet de synchroniser avec précision l’effet sur le rythme. Des réglages de triolet sont également disponibles : 1/6 = triolets de noires, 1/12 = triolets de croches, 1/ 24 = triolets de doubles croches. • Les types d’effets Echo (15–18) créent des répétitions retardées de chaque note jouée. • Les types d’effets Tremolo (19–22) répètent toutes les notes maintenues (jusqu’à quatre notes). • Les types d’effet Trill (23–26) créent des trilles à deux notes (notes alternées) lorsque deux notes sont maintenues enfoncées. Los tipos 15 a 26 son efectos basados en el ritmo y añaden embellecimientos o repeticiones retardadas en sincronización con el acompañamiento automático. Estos tipos suenan tanto si el acompañamiento automático está activado como si no; sin embargo, la velocidad real del efecto depende del ajuste de tempo (página 34). Los valores de las notas individuales en cada tipo le permiten sincronizar el efecto y el ritmo con una gran precisión. También hay disponibles ajustes de tresillos: 1/6 = tresillos de notas negras, 1/12 = tresillos de corcheas, 1/24 = tresillos de semicorcheas. • Los tipos de efectos de eco (15 a 18) crean repeticiones retardadas de cada nota tocada. • Los tipos de efectos de trémolo (19 a 22) repiten todas las notas que se mantienen pulsadas (hasta cuatro). • Los tipos de efectos de trino (23 a 26) crean trinos de dos notas (notas alternadas) cuando se mantienen pulsadas dos teclas. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 137 Effect Type List Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types ● Reverb Types / Reverb-Typen / Types d’effets Reverb / Tipos de reverberación No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 138 Type HALL1 HALL2 HALL3 HALL4 HALL5 HALL M HALL L BASIC HALL LARGE HALL ATMO HALL ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 ROOM4 ROOM5 ROOM6 ROOM7 ROOM S ROOM M ROOM L ACOSTIC ROOM DRUMS ROOM PERC ROOM STAGE1 STAGE2 STAGE3 STAGE4 PLATE1 PLATE2 PLATE3 GM PLATE TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT WHITE ROOM NO EFFECT Description Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Reverb suitable for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit. Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. No effect. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones MSB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 17 18 19 16 0 LSB 0 16 17 18 1 6 7 30 31 23 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 5 6 7 20 21 22 16 17 0 1 16 17 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos ● Chorus Types / Chorus-Typen / Types d’effets Chorus / Tipos de coro No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Type CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CHORUS5 CHORUS6 CHORUS7 CHORUS8 CHORUS FAST CHORUS LITE GM CHORUS1 GM CHORUS2 GM CHORUS3 GM CHORUS4 FB CHORUS CELESTE1 CELESTE2 SYMPHONIC1 SYMPHONIC2 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER4 FLANGER5 GM FLANGER ROTARY SP1 ROTARY SP2 ROTARY SP3 ROTARY SP4 ROTARY SP5 ROTARY SP6 ROTARY SP7 2WAY ROT SP AUTO PAN1 AUTO PAN2 EP AUTOPAN T_AUTO PAN1 TREMOLO1 TREMOLO2 TREMOLO3 EP TREMOLO GT TREMOLO1 GT TREMOLO2 T_TREMOLO NO EFFECT Description Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Simulates a rotary speaker. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Tempo synchronized Auto PAN. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. No effect. MSB 66 66 66 66 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 68 68 67 67 67 67 67 67 69 71 71 70 66 69 71 86 71 71 71 121 70 71 70 70 71 70 120 0 LSB 17 8 16 1 2 0 1 8 16 17 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 16 0 8 16 17 1 0 7 16 17 18 17 18 0 22 0 16 0 21 0 16 19 0 18 20 19 0 0 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 139 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos ● DSP Types / DSP Typen / Types de DSP / Tipos de DSP No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Type HALL1 HALL2 HALL3 HALL4 HALL5 HALL M HALL L BASIC HALL LARGE HALL ATMO HALL ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 ROOM4 ROOM5 ROOM6 ROOM7 ROOM S ROOM M ROOM L ACOSTIC ROOM DRUMS ROOM PERC ROOM STAGE1 STAGE2 STAGE3 STAGE4 PLATE1 PLATE2 PLATE3 GM PLATE TUNNEL CANYON BASEMENT WHITE ROOM CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CHORUS5 CHORUS6 CHORUS7 CHORUS8 CHORUS FAST CHORUS LITE GM CHORUS1 GM CHORUS2 GM CHORUS3 GM CHORUS4 FB CHORUS CELESTE1 CELESTE2 SYMPHONIC1 SYMPHONIC2 ENS DETUNE1 ENS DETUNE2 KARAOKE1 KARAOKE2 KARAOKE3 ER1 ER2 GATE REVERB REVERS GATE 64 EQ DISCO 65 EQ TEL 66 2BAND EQ 140 Description Reverb simulating the acoustics of a hall. Reverb simulating the acoustics of a room. Reverb suitable for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a plate reverb unit. Simulates a cylindrical space expanding to left and right. A hypothetical acoustic space which extends without limit. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Adds more stages to the modulation of Celeste. Chorus effect without modulation, created by adding a slightly pitch-shifted sound. Echo for karaoke. This effect isolates only the early reflection components of the reverb. Simulation of gated reverb. Simulation of gated reverb played back in reverse. Equalizer effect that boosts both high and low frequencies, as is typical in most disco music. Equalizer effect that cuts both high and low frequencies, to simulate the sound heard through a telephone receiver. Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones MSB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 17 18 19 16 66 66 66 66 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 66 66 68 68 87 87 20 20 20 9 9 10 11 LSB 0 16 17 18 1 6 7 30 31 23 16 17 18 19 0 1 2 5 6 7 20 21 22 16 17 0 1 16 17 0 7 0 0 0 0 17 8 16 1 2 0 1 8 16 17 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 16 0 0 16 0 1 2 0 1 0 0 76 16 76 17 77 0 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos No. 67 Type 3BAND EQ 68 ST 3BAND EQ 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 HM ENHANCE1 HM ENHANCE2 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER4 FLANGER5 GM FLANGER V_FLANGER TEMPO FLANGER DELAY LCR1 DELAY LCR2 DELAY LR ECHO CROSS DELAY TEMPO DELAY TEMPO ECHO TEMPO CROSS V_DST ROCA V_DST FUSION V_DST CRUNC V_DST VINTAG V_DST HARD2 V_DST HEAVY V_DST HARD1 V_DST SOFT DIST HARD1 DIST HARD2 DIST SOFT1 DIST SOFT2 DIST HEAVY OVERDRIVE1 OVERDRIVE2 ST DIST ST OD ST DIST HARD ST DIST SOFT AMP SIM1 AMP SIM2 ST AMP1 ST AMP2 ST AMP3 ST AMP4 ST AMP5 ST AMP6 DST+DELAY1 DST+DELAY2 OD+DELAY1 OD+DELAY2 CMP+DST+DLY1 CMP+DST+DLY2 CMP+OD+DLY1 CMP+OD+DLY2 V_DST H+DLY V_DST S+DLY DST+TDLY OD+TDLY COMP+DIST1 COMP+DIST2 CMP+DST+TDLY CMP+OD+TDLY1 CMP+OD+TDLY2 CMP+OD+TDLY3 CMP+OD+TDLY4 CMP+OD+TDLY5 CMP+OD+TDLY6 Description Mono EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies. Stereo EQ which emphasizes low and high frequencies, and attenuates mid-range frequencies. Adds new harmonics to the input signal to make the sound stand out. Adds a sweeping effect to the sound. Flanger which simulates vintage tube and fuzz sounds. Tempo synchronized flanger. Produces three delayed sounds: L, R and C (center). Produces two delayed sounds: L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. Two delayed sounds (L and R), and independent feedback delays for L and R. The feedback of the two delayed sounds is crossed. Tempo synchronized delay. Tempo synchronized delay. Tempo synchronized L&R delay. Vintage Distortion. Hard-edge distortion. Soft, warm distortion. Heavy distortion. Adds mild distortion to the sound. Stereo distortion. Stereo Overdrive. Hard-edge stereo distortion. Soft, warm soft distortion. A simulation of a guitar amp. Stereo amp simulator. Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. V Distortion and Delay are connected in series. Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Compressor and Distotion are connected in series. Compressor, Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Compressor, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. MSB LSB 76 0 76 18 81 81 67 67 67 67 67 67 104 107 5 5 6 7 8 21 21 22 103 103 98 98 98 98 98 98 75 75 75 75 73 74 74 73 74 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 96 98 98 100 100 73 73 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 16 0 8 16 17 1 0 7 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 18 19 28 29 30 31 0 2 16 22 17 23 0 0 9 8 8 18 19 0 1 20 21 8 24 25 26 16 0 17 1 16 0 17 1 1 3 0 1 16 1 0 1 16 17 18 19 20 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 141 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos No. 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Type V_DST H+TDL1 V_DST H+TDL2 V_DST S+TDL1 V_DST S+TDL2 COMP MED COMP HEAVY COMP MELODY COMP BASS MBAND COMP 144 COMPRESSOR 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 NOISE GATE VCE CANCEL AMBIENCE TALKING MOD ISOLATOR PHASER1 PHASER2 PHASER3 T_PHASER1 T_PHASER2 EP PHASER1 EP PHASER2 EP PHASER3 PITCH CHG1 PITCH CHG2 PITCH CHG3 DUAL ROT BRT D ROT BRT F DUAL ROT WRM D ROT WRM F DUAL ROT SP1 DUAL ROT SP2 ROTARY SP1 ROTARY SP2 ROT SP2 FAST ROTARY SP3 ROT SP3 FAST ROTARY SP4 ROT SP4 FAST ROTARY SP5 ROT SP5 FAST ROTARY SP6 ROTARY SP7 ROT SP7 FAST ROTARY SP8 ROT SP8 FAST ROTARY SP9 ROT SP9 FAST 2WAY ROT SP DST+ROT SP DST+2ROT SP OD+ROT SP OD+2ROT SP AMP+ROT SP AMP+2ROT SP AUTO PAN1 AUTO PAN2 AUTO PAN3 EP AUTOPAN T_AUTO PAN1 T_AUTO PAN2 TREMOLO1 TREMOLO2 TREMOLO3 EP TREMOLO GT TREMOLO1 GT TREMOLO2 VIBE VIBRATE T_TREMOLO 142 Description V Distotion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. This effect independently compresses the level of certain frequency bands in the sound. Holds down the output level when a specified input level is exceeded. A sense of attack can also be added to the sound. Gates the audio signal when the audio signal falls below a specified level. Attenuates the audio in the center position. Blurs the stereo positioning of the sound to add spatial width. Adds a vowel sound to the input signal. Attenuates the level of audio signals only at mid-range frequencies. Cyclically modulates the phase to add modulation to the sound. Changes the pitch of the input signal. Rotary speaker simulation with speed switching. Simulates a rotary speaker. Distortion and rotary speaker connected in series. Distortion and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Overdrive and rotary speaker connected in series. Overdrive and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Amp simulator and rotary speaker connected in series. Amp simulator and 2-way rotary speaker connected in series. Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right, front, back). Tempo synchronized pan. Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation. Vibraphone effect. Tempo synchronized tremolo. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones MSB 103 103 103 103 83 83 105 105 105 LSB 0 17 1 16 16 17 16 17 0 83 0 84 85 88 93 115 72 72 72 108 108 72 72 72 80 80 80 99 99 99 99 99 99 69 71 71 71 71 70 70 66 66 69 71 71 69 69 69 69 86 69 86 69 86 69 86 71 71 71 71 121 121 70 71 70 70 71 70 119 120 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 19 0 16 17 18 16 16 0 1 16 30 17 31 0 1 16 17 23 18 24 17 20 18 19 0 22 25 17 18 19 20 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 16 0 1 21 0 1 16 19 0 18 20 19 0 0 Effect Type List / Effekttypliste / Liste des types d’effets / Lista de tipos de efectos No. 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 Type AUTO WAH1 AUTO WAH2 AT WAH+DST1 AT WAH+DST2 AT WAH+OD1 AT WAH+OD2 TEMPO AT WAH TOUCH WAH1 TOUCH WAH2 TOUCH WAH3 TC WAH+DST1 TC WAH+DST2 TC WAH+OD1 TC WAH+OD2 WH+DST+DLY1 WH+DST+DLY2 WH+DST+TDLY WH+OD+DLY1 WH+OD+DLY2 WH+OD+TDLY1 WH+OD+TDLY2 CLVI TC WAH1 CLVI TC WAH2 EP TC WAH1 EP TC WAH2 PEDAL WAH PEDAL WH+DST P.WH+DIST HD P.WH+DIST HV P.WH+DIST LT PEDAL WH+OD P.WH+OD HD P.WH+OD HV P.WH+OD LT NO EFFECT THRU Description Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Distortion. The output of an Auto Wah can be distorted by Overdrive. Tempo synchronized auto wah. Changes the center frequency of a wah filter according to the input level. The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Distortion. The output of an Touch Wah can be distorted by Overdrive. Wah, Distortion and Delay are connected in series. WAH, Distortion and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Wah, Overdrive and Delay are connected in series. WAH, Overdrive and Tempo Delay are connected in series. Clavinet Touch Wah. EP Touch Wah. Pedal position changes the center frequency of the wah filter. Distortion applied to the pedal wah output. Overdrive (distortion) applied to the pedal wah output. No effect. Bypass without applying an effect. MSB 78 78 78 78 78 78 79 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 97 97 102 97 97 102 102 82 82 82 82 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 122 0 64 LSB 16 0 17 1 18 2 0 0 8 20 16 1 17 2 16 0 0 17 1 1 16 18 28 19 29 0 1 21 23 25 2 22 24 26 0 0 • Effect types cannot be adjusted, except for the following: Reverb level, Chorus level, DSP level on page 93 (For example, delay time cannot be changed in DELAY LCR1). • The actual effect may not be audible depending on the particular Voice. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 143 Specifications Specifications / Technische Daten / Spécifications techniques / Especificaciones Dimensions [W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 852mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 33-9/16") With music rest [W x D x H] 1,369mm x 502mm x 1,006mm (53-7/8" x 19-3/4" x 39-5/8") Weight Keyboard 49kg (108 lbs.) Type GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard with matte black keytops Number of keys 88 Touch Sensitivity Soft/Medium/Hard/Off Size and Type 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit) Pedal Damper (with half-pedal effect), Sostenuto, Soft Display Cabinet Voices Effects Styles Songs Score, Lyrics Yes Contrast Yes Key Cover Style Sliding Music rest Yes Tone Generation Technology AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Number of Dynamic Steps 3 Number of Polyphony (Max.) 64 Number of Voices 131panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices Reverb 35 types Chorus 44 types Harmony 26 types DSP 238 types Dual Yes Split Yes Number of Styles 160 Preset styles + External files Fingering Multi fingering/Full keyboard One Touch Setting Yes Number of Songs 30 Preset songs + 5 User songs + 70 External songs (CD-ROM) Recording 5 User Songs Easy Song Arranger Yes Lesson Yes Music Data Base Number of MDB 300 Preset MDB + External files Storage USB device Yes Range 5–280 Tempo Metronome Registration Memory Other Functions Connectivity Amplifiers/Speakers Accessories Optional Accessories Yes 8 Banks x 2 Piano Reset Yes Performance Assistant Technology Yes Transpose, Tuning Yes Headphones 2 USB TO HOST Yes USB TO DEVICE Yes Amplifiers 20W + 20W Speakers 12cm x 2 Included Accessories Accessories CD-ROM for Windows Installation Guide, My Yamaha Product User Registration, Bench (included or optional depending on locale), Owner’s Manual Headphones HPE-150 Floppy Disk Drive UD-FD01 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. * Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behält sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankündigung zu verändern oder zu modifizieren. Da die technischen Daten, das Gerät selbst oder Sonderzubehör nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha-Händler in Verbindung. * Les caractéristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode d’emploi ne sont données que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se réserve le droit de changer ou modifier les produits et leurs caractéristiques techniques à tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractéristiques techniques, les équipements et les options peuvent différer d’un pays à l’autre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche. * Las especificaciones y descripciones de este manual del propietario tienen sólo el propósito de servir como información. Yamaha Corp. se reserva el derecho a efectuar cambios o modificaciones en los productos o especificaciones en cualquier momento sin previo aviso. Puesto que las especificaciones, equipos u opciones pueden no ser las mismas en todos los mercados, solicite información a su distribuidor Yamaha. 144 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 145 146 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Verbraucherinformation zur Sammlung und Entsorgung alter Elektrogeräte Befindet sich dieses Symbol auf den Produkten, der Verpackung und/oder beiliegenden Unterlagen, so sollten benutzte elektrische Geräte nicht mit dem normalen Haushaltsabfall entsorgt werden. In Übereinstimmung mit Ihren nationalen Bestimmungen und den Richtlinien 2002/96/ EC, bringen Sie alte Geräte bitte zur fachgerechten Entsorgung, Wiederaufbereitung und Wiederverwendung zu den entsprechenden Sammelstellen. Durch die fachgerechte Entsorgung der Elektrogeräte helfen Sie, wertvolle Ressourcen zu schützen und verhindern mögliche negative Auswirkungen auf die menschliche Gesundheit und die Umwelt, die andernfalls durch unsachgerechte Müllentsorgung auftreten könnten. Für weitere Informationen zum Sammeln und Wiederaufbereiten alter Elektrogeräte, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtliche Stadt- oder Gemeindeverwaltung, Ihren Abfallentsorgungsdienst oder die Verkaufsstelle der Artikel. [Information für geschäftliche Anwender in der Europäischen Union] Wenn Sie Elektrogeräte ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Händler oder Zulieferer für weitere Informationen. [Entsorgungsinformation für Länder außerhalb der Europäischen Union] Dieses Symbol gilt nur innerhalb der Europäischen Union. Wenn Sie solche Artikel ausrangieren möchten, kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihre örtlichen Behörden oder Ihren Händler und fragen Sie nach der sachgerechten Entsorgungsmethode. Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 147 Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques. Le symbole sur les produits, l’emballage et/ou les documents joints signifie que les produits électriques ou électroniques usagés ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels. Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC. En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, vous contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d’un traitement inapproprié des déchets. Pour plus d’informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits. [Pour les professionnels dans l’Union Européenne] Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d’informations. [Information sur le traitement dans d’autres pays en dehors de l’Union Européenne] Ce symbole est seulement valables dans l’Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée. Información para Usuarios sobre Recolección y Disposición de Equipamiento Viejo Este símbolo en los productos, embalaje, y/o documentación que se acompañe significa que los productos electrónicos y eléctricos usados no deben ser mezclados con desechos hogareños corrientes. Para el tratamiento, recuperación y reciclado apropiado de los productos viejos, por favor llévelos a puntos de recolección aplicables, de acuerdo a su legislación nacional y las directivas 2002/96/EC. Al disponer de estos productos correctamente, ayudará a ahorrar recursos valiosos y a prevenir cualquier potencial efecto negativo sobre la salud humana y el medio ambiente, el cual podría surgir de un inapropiado manejo de los desechos. Para mayor información sobre recolección y reciclado de productos viejos, por favor contacte a su municipio local, su servicio de gestión de residuos o el punto de venta en el cual usted adquirió los artículos. [Para usuarios de negocios en la Unión Europea] Si usted desea deshacerse de equipamiento eléctrico y electrónico, por favor contacte a su vendedor o proveedor para mayor información. [Información sobre la Disposición en otros países fuera de la Unión Europea] Este símbolo sólo es válidos en la Unión Europea. Si desea deshacerse de estos artículos, por favor contacte a sus autoridades locales y pregunte por el método correcto de disposición. 148 Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CA U TI ON RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The above warning is located on the bottom of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 12 13 14 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) Owner’s Manual / Bedienungsanleitung / Mode d’emploi / Manual de instrucciones 149 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 MALAYSIA DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 EKB54 Yamaha Global Home http://www.yamaha.com Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2009 - 2011 Yamaha Corporation WR86780 103POCR*.*-**B0 Printed in Indonesia